9100 fuction descripsion
-
Upload
dayanidhi-panda -
Category
Documents
-
view
87 -
download
2
description
Transcript of 9100 fuction descripsion
Alcatel-Lucent GSM
9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS/9110-E
Micro BTS Functional Description
BTS Document
Sub-System Description
Release B10
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
Status RELEASED
Short title 9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS FD
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, useand communication of its contents not permitted without writtenauthorization from Alcatel-Lucent.
BLANK PAGE BREAK
2 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
Contents
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111.1 Logical Position of BTS in BSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.1.1 Functional Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131.1.2 Channel Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2 BTS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141.2.1 Transmission Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141.2.2 Telecommunication Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151.2.3 O&M Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151.2.4 Support Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3 BTS External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161.4 Signal and Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.4.1 Downlink Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201.4.2 Uplink Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.4.3 O&M Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.5 Functional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231.5.1 9100 BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231.5.2 BTS 9110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231.5.3 9110 Micro BTS-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2 Channel Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252.1 Introduction to Channel Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262.2 Radio Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.1 Radio Transmission Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262.2.2 Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272.2.3 Modulation Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.3 Channel Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282.3.1 Signalling Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282.3.2 Traffic Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302.3.3 Packet-Switched Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.4 Channel Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322.5 Radio Resource Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.5.1 Layer 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332.5.2 Layer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352.5.3 Layer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.6 SMS-CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362.6.1 Simplified SMS-CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362.6.2 Complete SMS-CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3 Transmission Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1 Introduction to Transmission Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403.2 Multiplexing Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2.1 Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403.2.2 Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423.2.3 Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423.2.4 Transmission O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433.2.5 Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433.2.6 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433.2.7 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.3 Abis Interface Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453.3.1 Second Abis Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463.3.2 No Cross Connect for Second Abis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.4 GPRS Transmission Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 3 / 234
Contents
4.1 Introduction to Telecommunication Functions - Baseband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.2 Baseband Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.2.1 Speech Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.2.2 Rate Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544.2.3 Channel Encoding and Decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584.2.4 Interleaving/De-interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594.2.5 Encryption/Decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594.2.6 Demodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.3 Call Management Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.3.1 Radio Link Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.3.2 Radio Resource Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.3.3 Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.3.4 Discontinuous Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624.3.5 Discontinuous Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624.3.6 Quality Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634.3.7 Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.4 Supervisory and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644.4.1 Clock Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644.4.2 Protocol Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644.4.3 Radio Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644.4.4 Transcoder Time Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.1 Introduction to Telecommunication Functions - RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685.2 RF Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.2.1 RF Carrier Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695.2.2 Frequency Hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695.2.3 Modulation and Up-Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705.2.4 Power Amplification and Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725.2.5 Channel Selection and Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745.2.6 Signal Amplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745.2.7 A-D Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755.2.8 Digital Pre-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.3 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765.4 Coupling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6 O&M and Support Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796.1 Introduction to O&M and Support Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806.2 O&M Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.2.1 O&M Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806.2.2 O&M Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816.2.3 Station Unit Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826.2.4 Recovery Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.3 Support Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836.3.1 HEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836.3.2 Internal Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836.3.3 Internal Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856.3.4 External Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866.3.5 MPS / MPS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876.3.6 Timing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7 Functional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897.1 Introduction to Functional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907.2 Functional Units Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.2.1 9100 BTS Functional Units Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907.2.2 BTS 9110/9110-E Functional Units Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.3 Mapping of Functions to Functional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967.3.1 Functional Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977.3.2 Telecommunication Baseband Functional Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
Contents
7.3.3 Telecommunication RF Functional Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997.3.4 O&M Functional Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007.3.5 Support Functional Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
8 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018.1 Naming Conventions Used for the Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028.2 9100 BTS Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.2.1 Configurations Using TWIN TRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038.2.2 9100 BTS Indoor Configurations - DC Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088.2.3 9100 BTS Indoor Configurations - AC Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138.2.4 9100 BTS Outdoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.3 BTS 9110 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248.4 9110 Micro BTS-E Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9 Antenna Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299.1 Introduction to Antenna Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.1.1 9100 BTS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309.1.2 BTS 9110/9110-E Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.2 Antenna Network Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319.2.1 9100 BTS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339.2.2 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
9.3 Antenna Network External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369.4 Antenna Network Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.4.1 9100 BTS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379.4.2 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.5 Antenna Network Software Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399.5.1 Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399.5.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.6 Range Extension Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409.6.1 Masthead Amplification Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419.6.2 Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.7 Tower Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439.7.1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439.7.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.8 GSM/UMTS Co-siting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10 Station Unit Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15110.1 Introduction to the Station Unit Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15210.2 Station Unit Module Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15210.3 Station Module External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15410.4 Station Unit Module Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15410.5 Station Unit Module Software Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10.5.1 O&M Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15510.5.2 Transmission Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15610.5.3 Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
11 Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15711.1 Introduction to Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15811.2 Transceiver Equipment Functional Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15811.3 Transceiver Equipment External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16511.4 Transceiver Equipment Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16611.5 Transceiver Equipment Software Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
11.5.1 SCP Software Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16811.5.2 ENCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17011.5.3 DEM, RXP and DEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17211.5.4 MBED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17511.5.5 CUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17511.5.6 BCBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
11.6 Transceiver Equipment Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 5 / 234
Contents
11.6.1 Transceiver Equipment Power Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17611.6.2 Unbalanced Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18012.2 SUM/MSUM Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18212.3 Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.3.1 BTS Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18312.3.2 SUM Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18312.3.3 Other BTS Software Packages Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18312.3.4 Management of Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12.4 Software Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
13 BTS Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
13.1 BTS Managed Objects and SBLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18813.2 BTS Managed Objects and SBLs Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18913.3 BTS Managed Objects (SBL) Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19313.4 Allowed Managed Object/SBL States of the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS . . . . . . . . 194
13.4.1 Allowed States of Managed Object Abis_PCM (SBL Abis-HWAY-TP) . . . . . . . 19413.4.2 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19413.4.3 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19413.4.4 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CLLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19513.4.5 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19513.4.6 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) EACB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19613.4.7 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) FU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19613.4.8 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) OMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19713.4.9 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) RA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
13.5 Allowed Managed Objects and SBL States of the 9100 BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19813.5.1 Allowed States of Managed Object Abis_PCM (SBL Abis-HWAY-TP) . . . . . . . 19813.5.2 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19813.5.3 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19913.5.4 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CLLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19913.5.5 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20013.5.6 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) EACB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20013.5.7 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) FU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20113.5.8 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) OMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20113.5.9 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) RA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
13.6 Allowed Managed Objects and SBL Actions for 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS . . . . . 20313.7 Allowed Managed Objects and SBL Actions for 9100 BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20413.8 BTS 9110/9110-E RITs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20513.9 BTS 9110/9110-E SBLs and RITs Reported to the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20613.10 9100 BTS RITs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20713.11 9100 BTS SBLs and RITs Reported to the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21013.12 BTS RBLs and Local Fault Indication via LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14 Example Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21514.1 Telecommunication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
14.1.1 Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21614.1.2 Timing Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21714.1.3 Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21814.1.4 Channel Interference Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21814.1.5 LAPD Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21814.1.6 In-Band Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
14.2 Telecommunications Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21914.3 Mobile Station RF Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
15 Software Interaction Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22315.1 BCCH-TRE Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22415.2 Interaction Fault Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
Contents
16 Start-Up Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22716.1 BTS/SUM/MSUM Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22816.2 Restart SBL BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22916.3 Restart SBL OMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23016.4 SBL OMU Auto-Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23116.5 Reset SBL BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23216.6 Reset SBL OMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23316.7 SBL OMU Auto-Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 7 / 234
Contents
8 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
Preface
Preface
Purpose This document provides a functional description of the GSM 9100 BTS and the9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS.
The purpose of this document is to explain the role of the 9100 BTS and 9110Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS in a GSM network.
All features and functions described in this document may not be availableon your system.
What’s New In Edition 08Description improvement in Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support(Section 9.7.2).
In Edition 07Update with the new equipment naming.
In Edition 06Description improvement in:
9100 BTS Modules (Section 9.4.1)
Transceiver Equipment Modules (Section 11.4).
In Edition 05Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 9.7.2) was added.
In Edition 04Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 9.7.2) was added.
In Edition 03Information about AGCL9P was removed.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 9 / 234
Preface
In Edition 02Information about AGX module was removed.
In Edition 01First release of the document.
Audience This document is intended for anyone interested in learning about theAlcatel-Lucent BTSs.
Assumed Knowledge The reader must possess a:
General knowledge of telecommunications systems and terminology
Good understanding of GSM concepts
Familiarity with BSS functions and architecture
Embedded/real-time software techniques.
10 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
1 Overview
1 Overview
This Overview provides a simplified overview of the 9100 BTS and 9110 MicroBTS/9110-E Micro BTS together with their role in a GSM network.
After explaining the logical position of the BTS in the BSS, the chapter showsthe functional architecture of the BTS. It then outlines how the BTS processesuplink and downlink data to interface the land-based telephone system withMobile Stations.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 11 / 234
1 Overview
1.1 Logical Position of BTS in BSSThe BTS provides two-way radio communication between the PSTN, andMobile Stations located in a single GSM cell. It also provides a similar linkbetween the Mobile Stations and the rest of the PLMN. The BTS provides aninterface for the digital baseband signals used by the land-based networks andthe GSM radio signals used by Mobile Stations.
To achieve its overall function, the BTS provides:
Facilities to transmit and receive appropriate radio signals
Management of the protocols used on the BTS - BSC and BTS - MobileStation links. This provides a communications path ’open’ to GSM standards
Cell-specific O&M functions
Low-level local control, including radio resource management.
Environment The following figures show the logical position of a BTS in theBSS, between the BSC and Mobile Stations currently located in the cell area.
BTS BSC
Other BTS
Cell Area
Radio Frequency Signals
Mobiles Station
Mobile Station
Mobile Station
Uplink
Downlink
BSS
TCMSC
via Air Interface
Traffic and Signaling via Abis Interface
TC = Transcoder
Figure 1: Logical Position of BTS in BSS
For systems incorporating GPRS some additional components are required asshown in the following figure. An MFS is placed in the system between the BSCand the SGSN. The MFS contains a number of PCUs, one of which controlsall the GPRS activity for one cell.
12 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
1 Overview
Cell Area
Radio Frequency Signals
Mobile Station
Mobile Station
Uplink
Downlink
BSS
MSC
via Air Interface
PCU
MFS
SGSN
GbInterface
PDN
Mobile Station
BTS BSC
TC
Traffic and Signaling via Abis Interface
Figure 2: Logical Position of BTS in BSS with GPRS
The SGSN (see the figure above) keeps track of the location of individualMobile Stations. The SGSN also performs both security functions andaccess control. GPRS services are not available until the Mobile Station hasestablished contact with the SGSN.
1.1.1 Functional Architecture
The following figure shows the functional architecture of the BTS.
Telecommunication Functions
Abis InterfaceRF Functions Baseband Functions Transmission
FunctionsTransmit/ReceiveAntennas
Support Functions
To all Functions
O&M FunctionsPart of the Telecommunicationsfunctions are duplicated forAntenna Diversity.
Data flows through the BTS in the downlink directionData flows through the BTS in the uplink direction
Figure 3: BTS Functional Architecture
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 13 / 234
1 Overview
1.1.2 Channel Organization
RF signals over the Air Interface carry traffic and signalling/control channelswhich are organized according to GSM recommendations. The allocation andcontrol of these channels are managed by the BTS functions.
Radio Resource Management functions control and organize radio resources tomeet the current operational needs of both the network and individual users.
Systems using GPRS services have additional channel allocation as describedin Channel Organization (Section 2).
Channel Organization and Radio Resource Management are also described inChannel Organization (Section 2).
1.2 BTS FunctionsAs the principal interface between the PSTN and Mobile Stations, the BTSperforms four primary functions.
These are:
Transmission functions, which manage the transfer of traffic and control
data between the BTS and BSC
Telecommunications functions, which manage the transfer of traffic andcontrol data between the BTS and the Mobile Stations
O&M functions, which supervise the operation of the BTS
Support functions, which provide a logical and physical environment inwhich the BTS functions can be realized.
Communication between the transmission, telecommunications, and O&Mfunctions is managed according to the OSI model. The BTS functions areconcerned with Layer 1 (Physical), Layer 2 (Data Link), and Layer 3 (Network)of this model.
1.2.1 Transmission Functions
To minimize operating costs, all data passed between the BTS and the BSCis time-division multiplexed onto a single physical interface. This is the AbisInterface, which carries all the data sent between the BSC and BTS.
Logical links between the BSC and BTS handle the following information:
Signalling data used for control purposes
O&M data for the BTS transmission modules
O&M data for the BTS entities
User data in the form of speech and data traffic.
The Abis Interface is described in greater detail in Transmission Functions(Section 3).
14 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
1 Overview
1.2.2 Telecommunication Functions
There are two primary telecommunication functions:
Baseband functionsBaseband functions modulate and encode traffic and signalling data fromthe BSC according to GSM recommendations. This data is then sent tothe Mobile Stations using the RF functions. Traffic and signalling receivedfrom the Mobile Stations is demodulated and decoded to recover thebaseband data. Baseband processing is discussed in TelecommunicationFunctions - Baseband (Section 4).
RF functionsRF functions enable traffic and signalling to be sent and received over theAir Interface as a radio signal. A special link layer protocol ensures thereliable transfer of signalling data over the Air Interface. The RF functionsare described in Telecommunication Functions - RF (Section 5).
For Antenna Diversity, the telecommunications functions uplink path isduplicated. The duplicated functions extend from the antennas, through the RFfunctions, and up to the output of the Decoder in the baseband functions.
1.2.3 O&M Functions
O&M functions monitor and control the correct operation of the BTS and itsexternal interfaces. These functions are shared between the BTS and the BSC.The BSC provides overall control.
The O&M functions use Layer 2 links for BTS internal communications. Aterminal connected via an MMI is used for local operator control of the BTS.
There are four categories of O&M functions:
Configuration Management
Fault Management
Dedicated Alarm and Control Handling
External Alarm Handling.
The O&M functions also control the operation of the RF Self-tests and managethe actions required by the BTS Recovery Strategy.
The BTS O&M functions are described in O&M and Support Functions(Section 6).
1.2.4 Support Functions
The support functions provide a number of services relevant to the internalworking of the BTS.
They are:
Clock generation and distribution
External alarm collection
Internal self-tests.
The support functions are also described in O&M and Support Functions(Section 6).
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 15 / 234
1 Overview
1.3 BTS External InterfacesThe BTS uses a number of external interfaces. These interfaces are describedin the following table.
Interface Description 9100
9110MicroBTS/9110-EMicroBTS
Air The Air Interface is the radio link between the BSS and the MobileStation. The BTS uses an external RF interface to realize theAir Interface.
Four frequency ranges are allocated to the GSM 850, GSM 900,GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 variants. Each range is divided intotwo bands. One band is for use by the uplink, the other by thedownlink.
The Air Interface functions are described in Channel Organization(Section 2).
Y Y
Abis Uplink and downlink and control data between the BSC and BTSis carried by the Abis Interface. This interface is specified as aG.703/704 2048 kbit/s PCM link (GSM rec. 04.06).
The Abis Interface and transmission functions are described inChapter 3.
Y Y
External AlarmConnection
The external alarm connection function is implemented as theExternal Input Output Interface. The XIO enables the 9100 BTSexternal alarm sources to be interfaced to the O&M functions.The connection is made via the dedicated alarm functions.
The external alarm connection function is used only inconfigurations where external alarm sources are present - e.g.,cabinet door switch, smoke detector.
External alarm handling is described in O&M and SupportFunctions (Section 6).
Y Y
XBAT The External Battery Connection is used to provide control overan external battery backup unit.
N Y
XCLK The External Clock Interface enables the BTS to synchronize withother BTSs in either master or slave mode.
Timing functions are described in O&M and Support Functions(Section 6).
Y N
XBCB The External BTS Control Bus is used to supervise or controlexternal events. It can be used to perform external RemoteInventory on the BTS, but only if the BTS is not powered up andonly at factory level.
Y N
16 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
1 Overview
Interface Description 9100
9110MicroBTS/9110-EMicroBTS
XGPS The External Global Positioning System Control Bus providescontrol and supervisory functions for an external GPS receiver.The receiver is used to provide an external clock synchronizationsignal for the BTS. Using a GPS module removes the need for theyearly calibration of the BTS internal clock.
N Y
XST_RA The External Stealth Radio Connection provides the control linkbetween the MSUM and Stealth Radio equipment.
N Y
IEB The Inter Entity Bus is used to connect a single master 9110Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS to a maximum of five BTSs in slavemode (refer to Figure 4 ). The identity of the BTS 9110/9110-Eentity is determined by the connections of the IEB cable.
The master BTS 9110/9110-E can have cables connected toports S1 and S2. Each of these cables is terminated at the M portof a slave BTS 9110/9110-E. The units are identified as master,slave 1 and slave 2 via the Addressing bus. Internal addressingof the MTRE allows each MTRE to be addressed independentlyby the master unit.
N Y
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 17 / 234
1 Overview
Interface Description 9100
9110MicroBTS/9110-EMicroBTS
MMI A local MMI enables a terminal to be connected for local operatorcontrol of the BTS.
Refer to the BTS Terminal User Guide for more information aboutlocal operator control of the 9100 BTS.
Y Y
Power SupplyConnection
The mains supply voltage for a 9100 BTS is determined by theinternal power supply modules fitted
The requirement can be:
AC (230 VAC)
DC (-48/-60 VDC nominal).
The 9100 BTS modules are provided with their own DC/DCconverters. Power on/off of these modules is controlled by theO&M functions via the internal BCB Interface.
For the 9110 Micro BTS, power is supplied to the master 9110Micro BTS. All other 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS entitiesare supplied from cabling from the first entity. For each 9110 MicroBTS there is only one centralized power supply, the MPS. For the9110 Micro BTS-E the power supply is the MPS2. These modulessupply the power and different voltages for all the modules.
The input voltage requirements are as follows:
AC 170 VAC through 270 VAC (230 VAC through 240 VAC
Nominal) at 47 Hz through 63 Hz
DC 270 VDC through 358 VDC.
The BTS main power connection is filtered and provided withone or more protection breakers. Lightning protection is providedfor AC power lines.
In case of 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS together with anSSC each BTS will be supplied by the SSC (also the slaves).
For more information about power supply connections, refer to theappropriate hardware documents.
Y Y
Table 1: BTS External Interfaces
18 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
1 Overview
The following figures shows how the IEB is used to connect a single master9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS to up to two 9110 Micro BTS in slave mode,and up to five 9110 Micro BTS-E in cascading slave mode.
Master BTS A9110
Slave 2 BTS A9110
Slave 1 BTS A9110
M S1 S2 M S1 S2 M S1 S2
Figure 4: IEB Connections for Pure 9110 Micro BTS
Slave 1BTS
A9110−E
Slave 12 Slave 11
M S1 S2 M S1 S2 M S1 S2
Master Slave 2 Slave 21
M S1 S2 M S1 S2 M S1 S2
Slave 1 Slave 12 Slave 11
M S1 S2 M S1 S2 M S1 S2
Master Slave 2
M S1 S2 M S1 S2
Slave 1
BTS A9110
Slave 12BTS A9110−E
Slave 11 BTS A9110−E
M S1 S2 M S1 S2 M S1 S2
Master
BTS A9110−E
Slave 2
BTSA9110
M S1 S2 M S1 S2
Slave 21 BTS A9110−E
S2 M S1 S2
Slave 21 BTS A9110−E
M S1 S2
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110−E
BTS A9110
x : The 9110 Micro BTS in the configuration does not allow connection of lower slaves. The master must be an 9110-EMicro BTS.
Figure 5: IEB Connections for Pure 9110-E Micro BTS and Mixed 9110-E Micro BTS + 9110 Micro BTSs
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 19 / 234
1 Overview
1.4 Signal and Data ProcessingDownlink data flows through the BTS from the Abis Interface to the transmitantennae. Uplink data flows from the receive antennae to the Abis Interface.
1.4.1 Downlink Signal Processing
Downlink signal processing consists of several functions and processes, whichare described in the following sections.
1.4.1.1 Transmission FunctionsThe transmission functions demultiplex digital baseband data received viathe Abis Interface:
BTS entity O&M data is passed to the O&M functions.
Transmission O&M data is handled locally by the transmission functions.
Traffic and associated control data is demultiplexed to form a number of
discrete data streams. The number of data streams, up to eight full-rate or16 half-rate, depends on the telecom configuration. The data streams are
passed to the baseband functions for processing.
1.4.1.2 Baseband ProcessingThe baseband functions encode each data stream as a series of data bursts.Each burst occupies one TDMA time slot.
The baseband processing assembles the TDMA bursts into the GSM framehierarchy in accordance with GSM rec. 05.01. This recommendation specifiesa number of time slot groups, within which individual time slots are allocatedto downlink TDMA channels in a cyclical manner.
1.4.1.3 Channel OrganizationWithin a cell of a BTS a single data stream is dedicated to carry the mandatoryBCCH. All other time slots are available to carry baseband traffic data andassociated signalling channel data.
The associated signalling channel data is carried on the SDCCH. This channelis used for call establishment and location update. It is also used with the SMSand Cell Broadcast features. For more information about channel types,refer to Channel Types (Section 2.3).
The data bursts are organized into the GSM frame hierarchy, then they aresent to the RF functions. The RF functions generate one or more carrierfrequencies, which are modulated by the downlink data. This enables thedownlink data to be sent over the Air Interface as a radio signal.
20 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
1 Overview
1.4.1.4 Frequency HoppingSuccessive TDMA bursts from each data stream can be transmitted on a fixedcarrier frequency. Alternatively, successive bursts can be transmitted ondifferent carrier frequencies, chosen from the set of frequencies generated bythe RF functions. The process of transmitting successive bursts on differentfrequencies is called frequency hopping.
For both methods of burst transmission, the resulting combination of a timeslot and a specific radio frequency creates a GSM channel. This channel isunique within the cell.
Only TCHs and SDCCHs are frequency hopped. The BCCH is always senton a constant carrier frequency. Frequency hopping is implemented undercontrol of the FHA.
1.4.1.5 Coupling FunctionsThe RF functions include coupling functions which ensure the efficienttransfer of RF power to the antennae. The coupling functions enable the BTStransmitters and receivers to use two antennae to maximize RF performance.
1.4.2 Uplink Signal Processing
Uplink signal processing is essentially the reverse of the downlink processingdescribed in Downlink Signal Processing (Section 1.4.1).
1.4.2.1 Channel DecodingRadio signals received from Mobile Stations are routed from the antennaeto the RF functions.
When antenna diversity is configured, the signals from the second antennaprovide the BTS with a choice of two signals. Both signals are combined in theDecoder using the maximum radio combining algorithm.
The RF functions also include a duplexing function, which enables the BTSreceivers to share the transmit antennae.
The RF functions remove the RF carrier and produce samples which representthe data contained in the incoming signals.
1.4.2.2 Frequency HoppingEach uplink channel can be on a fixed carrier frequency, or it can be frequencyhopped by the sending Mobile Station. If frequency hopping is configured,successive databursts associated with an uplink channel are received ondifferent carrier frequencies. This process is implemented under control ofthe FHA.
1.4.2.3 Signal ProcessingThe RF functions send the representative samples to the baseband functions.The baseband functions carry out GMSK demodulation and equalization torecover the baseband data.
The baseband functions send the recovered baseband data to the transmissionfunctions. From here the uplink data is multiplexed onto the Abis Interface.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 21 / 234
1 Overview
1.4.3 O&M Data Processing
The O&M functions are connected to all of the BTS functional entities, and also(via the Abis Interface), to the BSC.
The BTS is responsible for its own fault detection and localization. The BSCneed not, therefore, know the internal structure of the BTS.
O&M functions are provided for:
Configuration Management
Performance Management
Fault Management.
The O&M functions are described in O&M and Support Functions (Section 6).
22 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
1 Overview
1.5 Functional UnitsThe functional units are those elements that implement the BTS functions. Thefunctional units are described in the following sections.
1.5.1 9100 BTS
The functional units used in the 9100 BTS are:
Transmitter and Receiver Equipment (TRE)
Antenna Network (AN)
Station Unit Module (SUM).
These modules are installed in varied combinations within the 9100 BTS toprovide sectorized and omni-directional configurations. Other, non-intelligent,modules provide connection and power supply services.
One SUMP can control up to 8 TRE modules in an omni-directionalconfiguration or 12 TRE modules in a sectorized configuration. In case ofTwin TRE usage one SUMA/SUMX can control up to 16 TRE modules in anomni-directional configuration or 24 TRE modules in a sectorized configuration.Each TRE module is connected to the antennae using the AN modules.Different types of AN are available; their use depends on the number of TREs,whether or not antenna diversity is used, and the type of configuration.
The 9100 BTS supports multiband BTSs, where different sectors of amultisector configuration operate in different frequency bands. This allows anincrease in network capacity without installing new sites.
For more information about the functional units refer to Functional Units(Section 7).
1.5.2 BTS 9110
The functional units used in the BTS 9110 are:
Micro-BTS Transmitter and Receiver Equipment (MTRE)
Micro-BTS Antenna Network (MAN)
Micro-BTS Station Unit Module (MSUM)
Connection Box (COBO).
For the BTS 9110 the MAN changes depending on if the BTS is configured withone (MAN1) or two antennae (MAN2). All other functional unit configurationsare the same, regardless of whether sectorized or omni-directionalconfigurations are used. The master and slave BTSs are physically identical.GSM 900 and GSM 1800 versions differ only in the analog part of the MTREand MAN. A single BTS 9110 entity consists of two MTREs and a MAN.The MTRE can be configured to belong either to the same sector or to besplit into different sectors.
One MSUM (the BTS 9110 master) can control up to six MTRE modules(that is, one master and two slaves) independent of the configuration(omni-directional or sectorized configuration). Each MTRE module is connectedto the antennae using the MAN module.
Two different types of MAN are available. Their use depends on the use ofone antenna or two antenna BTS. For BTSs with one antenna, the MTREs are
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 23 / 234
1 Overview
internally combined in the MAN and therefore no receiver diversity is available.For BTSs with two antennae, each of the units MTREs has an antenna andreceiver diversity is possible.
The BTS 9110 supports multiband BTSs, where different sectors of amultisector configuration operate in different frequency bands. This allows anincrease in network capacity without installing new sites.
For more information about the functional units refer to Functional Units(Section 7).
There may be an optional SSC located adjacent to the 9110 Micro BTS.If present, it can contain the network termination, the microwave and otherexternal equipment.
The SSC can provide power to up to three 9110 Micro BTSs.
1.5.3 9110 Micro BTS-E
The functional units used in the 9110 Micro BTS-E are:
Micro-BTS Transmitter and Receiver Equipment (MTREDA)
Micro-BTS Antenna Network (MAN)
Micro-BTS Station Unit Module (MSUMA)
Connection Box (COBO).
For the 9110 Micro BTS-E the MAN changes depending on if the BTS isconfigured with one (MANM) or two antennae (MAND). All other functionalunit configurations are the same, regardless of whether sectorized oromni-directional configurations are used. The master and slave BTSs arephysically identical. GSM 850, GSM 900 GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 versionsdiffer only in the analog part of the MTREDA and MAN. A single 9110 MicroBTS-E entity consists of two MTREDA and a MAN. The MTREDA can beconfigured to belong either to the same sector or to be split into different sectors.
One MSUMA (the 9110 Micro BTS-E master) can control up to 12 MTREDAmodules (one master and five cascading slaves), independent of configuration(omni-directional or sectorized configuration). Each MTREDA module isconnected to the antennae using the MAN module.
Two different types of MAN are available. Their use depends on the use of oneantenna or two antennae BTS. For BTSs with one antenna, the MTREDAsare internally combined in the MANM and therefore no receiver diversity isavailable. For BTSs with two antennae, each of the units MTREDAs has anantenna and receiver diversity is possible for MAND.
The 9110 Micro BTS-E supports multiband BTSs, where different sectors of amultisector configuration operate in different frequency bands. This allows anincrease in network capacity without installing new sites.
For more information about the functional units refer to Functional Units(Section 7) .
There may be an optional SSC located adjacent to the BTS 9110-E. If present,it can contain the network termination, the microwave and other externalequipment.
The SSC can provide power to up to three 9110/9110-E BTSs.
24 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
2 Channel Organization
2 Channel Organization
This chapter describes the Air Interface channel organization.
The various features associated with these channels are described in thefollowing sections:
Radio Use
Channel Types
Channel Structure
Radio Resource Management
SMS-CB.
The chapter breaks down each category into individual functions, and explainshow each type of channel is used.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 25 / 234
2 Channel Organization
2.1 Introduction to Channel OrganizationThe Air Interface is the radio link between the BSS and the Mobile Station.
The Air Interface uses several channel types that are organized in combinationsaccording to GSM recommendations. The transmission of these channels ismanaged in a logical manner according to the OSI seven-layer model. Thevarious features associated with these channels are described in the followingsections.
2.2 Radio UseFour frequency ranges are supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS: GSM 850,GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900. Each range is divided into two bands.One band is for use by the uplink, the other by the downlink.
The number of channels available depends on a number of factors.
2.2.1 Radio Transmission Channels
Radio transmission channels are spaced at 200 kHz intervals within each band.A guard space is left at both ends of each band.
The number of uplink and downlink frequency channels used by a BTS isdetermined by the desired cell capacity.
A 9100 BTS equipped with SUMP board can use up to 12 uplink frequencychannels, and up to 12 downlink frequency channels, with a sectorizedconfiguration. For an omni-directional configuration up to 8 channels areallowed. A BTS 9100 equipped with SUMA/SUMX board and Twin TRE canuse up to 24 uplink frequency channels, and up to 24 downlink frequencychannels, with a sectorized configuration. For an omni-directional configurationup to 16 channels are allowed.
A 9110 Micro BTS can use up to six uplink and downlink frequency channels inan omni-directional or sectorized configurations.
A 9110 Micro BTS-E can use up to 12 uplink and downlink frequency channelsin a sectorized configuration.
26 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
2 Channel Organization
2.2.2 Frequencies
The following table shows the uplink and downlink frequencies and the numberof transmission channels available.
System Downlink (MHz) Uplink (MHz) Channels
GSM 850 869 - 894 824 - 849 124
GSM 900 (P-GSM) 935 - 960 890 - 915 124
GSM 900 (E-GSM) 925 - 960 880 - 915 174
GSM 1800 1805 - 1880 1710 - 1785 374
GSM 1900 1930 - 1990 1850 - 1910 299
Table 2: GSM 850, GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 Frequency Ranges
The 9100 BTS MINI and MEDI cabinets do not support the GSM 850 band.GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubtplease contact the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Services.The 9110 Micro BTS does not support the GSM 850 band nor the GSM 1900band.The analog part and the power amplifier support the E-GSM band, but the MANcurrently only supports the P-GSM band.The 9110 Micro BTS-E supports the 850, 900, 1800 and the 1900 band.
2.2.3 Modulation Technique
GSM 850, GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 systems use GMSKmodulation, which provides a good compromise between spectral efficiencyand ease of demodulation.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 27 / 234
2 Channel Organization
2.3 Channel TypesThe allocated uplink and downlink frequency bands use a combination ofFDMA and TDMA.
The use of FDMA and TDMA results in a large number of discrete physicalchannels, each of which can carry traffic or signalling information.
The logical channels carried by the FDMA/TDMA time slots are classifiedas either:
Signalling Channels
TCHs
Packet Switched Channels.
2.3.1 Signalling Channels
Signalling channels are divided into three groups, each containing a number ofchannel types. Each group is described separately.
2.3.1.1 Broadcast ChannelsBCHs are used to control Mobile Station RF transmissions. They also updateMobile Stations on the status of the cells with which they can communicate.
There are three types of BCH:
FCCHThe Mobile Station uses the FCCH to synchronize its RF transmissionfrequency to the allotted channel. It is also used by the Mobile Station whenthe Mobile Station is first switched on, or otherwise enters a service area.At this point, the FCCH enables the Mobile Station to obtain an approximateindication of the boundaries between time slots. This reveals the position ofTime Slot 0, which the FCCH occupies. From this starting point, the MobileStation locates the SCH. It can then time its random access burst withinthe available window (see below).
SCHThe SCH provides the Mobile Station with precise information about thetiming and frame numbering of the BTS. This enables the Mobile Stationto maintain correct frame alignment with the BTS timing schedule. TheMobile Station advances its timing schedule to compensate for changesin Mobile Station - BTS distance. (Refer to Layer 3 (Section 2.5.1), underDedicated Channel Management.)
BCCHThe BCCH carries general information. This includes the identity ofneighboring cells, maximum cell transmit power and details of theconfiguration of the other signalling channels. In GPRS systems thischannel is known as the PBCCH.
28 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
2 Channel Organization
2.3.1.2 Common Control ChannelsThe CCCH is used for access control and is shared between all MobileStations in a cell.
There are three types of CCCH:
RACHThe RACH allows a Mobile Station to access the network. When a MobileStation first detects a BCH carrier, and if a location update is needed, ittries to access the BTS. It does this by sending a random access burst onthe RACH. Timing of the random access burst is based on informationderived from the FCCH/SCH.Once the Mobile Station is camped on a cell, it remains in Idle mode until itneeds to communicate with the BTS. For this purpose, it requests access todedicated radio resources.
Access can be requested:
To originate a call from the Mobile Station
In response to a Paging message when a call is originated by the network
When a location update becomes necessary.
The Access request is sent on the RACH in the form of an Access Requestmessage. In GPRS systems this channel is known as the PRACH.
AGCHThe AGCH is used by the BTS to send an Immediate Assignment messageto the Mobile Station, following an Access Request. The message allocatesan SDCCH to the Mobile Station, so that a TCH can be specified for the call.In GPRS systems this channel is known as the PAGCH.
PCHThe PCH is used by the BTS to notify a Mobile Station that there is anincoming call. The Mobile Station responds on the RACH.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 29 / 234
2 Channel Organization
2.3.1.3 Dedicated Control ChannelsDCCHs are allocated to carry control information for a specific Mobile Station.
They can be of two types, associated or stand alone:
ACCH
The ACCH takes two forms, depending on the operational condition ofthe Mobile Station:
SACCHThe SACCH is allocated with a SDCCH or TCH, and is presentthroughout the duration of a call. It carries non-urgent control information,including timing advance data.
FACCHUnlike other channels, the FACCH has no dedicated part in the GSMmultiframe. Instead it ’steals’ capacity in the TCH when it is necessary tosend urgent control information. This process is referred to as bit stealing.
In GPRS systems this channel is known as the PACCH.
SDCCHThe SDCCH is allocated dynamically by an Immediate Assignment messagesent on the AGCH. It is used for low-rate control communication duringcall establishment. The SDCCH specifies the TCH with an Assignmentcommand, and handles all signalling until the TCH is set up. The SDCCH isalso invoked during location update and for SMS.
2.3.2 Traffic Channels
There are five Full-Rate Traffic Channel (TCH/F) types and one Half-Rate TrafficChannel (TCH/H) type. The following table shows the different types of channel.
Channel Type TCH/F TCH/H
Encoded speech X X
14.4 kbit/s data X -
9.6 kbit/s data X -
4.8 kbit/s data X -
2.4 kbit/s data X -
Table 3: TCH/F and TCH/H Types
In order to maximize the use of available bandwidth, TCHs are allocated toMobile Stations only when required. The allocation is therefore made onlywhen a call is established. An SACCH is always allocated with a TCH,as described earlier.
30 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
2 Channel Organization
2.3.3 Packet-Switched Channels
Just as for traffic (voice) services, different logical channels are defined forGPRS / EGPRS. These channels are classified into traffic channels and controlchannels. Some channels are bi-directional, other channels are uni-directional.
While its function is similar to the logical channels defined for voice service,the Packet Timing Advance Control Channel (PTCCH) is new. In the uplink,the mobile transmits a random access burst (one mobile per PTCCH). In thedownlink, the network transmits timing advance information to the mobiles(several mobiles per PTCCH).
For GPRS the packet data blocks CS-1, CS-2, CS-3 and CS-4 and all packetcontrol channels are implemented. All channels configured as TCHs canbe dynamically configured for packet switched channels. This dynamicconfiguration is handled by the BSC.
Up to eight Packet Data Traffic Channels (PDTCH) (limited to five due to mobileconstraints in the first software releases) on different time-slots but on the sametransceiver can be allocated to one mobile at the same time (dependingon the multi-slot capabilities of the mobile). Several mobiles can share thesame PDCH.
It is possible to mix GPRS and EGPRS on the same Packet Data Channel(PDCH). Up to 16 users can share a Packet Data Channel (PDCH). TheAlcatel-Lucent implementation allows a maximum of seven users in uplink plusnine users in downlink for the initial release. In later releases, a maximum of sixusers in uplink plus ten users in downlink can share one PDCH.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 31 / 234
2 Channel Organization
2.4 Channel StructureA group of one or more channels can be multiplexed onto a single time slot insuccessive TDMA frames, in a cyclical manner.
The following table shows the channel combinations allowed by GSM rec.05.02 Sec. 6.4. Full-rate and half-rate channel combinations are available inall BTS hardware configurations. For further details about possible hardwareconfigurations, refer to Functional Units (Section 7).
MultiframeType Channel Combination
TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/F26-multiframe
TCH/H + SACCH/H + FACCH/H
BCCH + CCCH + SCH + FCCH
FCCH + SCH + BCCH + PCH + RACH + AGCH +4 x SDCCH/4 + SACCH x 4
BCCH + PCH + RACH + AGCH
51-multiframe
8 x SDCCH/8 + SACCH x 8
Table 4: Possible Channel Combinations for Single Time Slot
Channels are multiplexed into the following types of frame with a fixedrelationship between transmit and receive timing.
Frame Type Description
26-Multiframe The simplest example is the TCH and SACCH. These are combined into a 4 x 26 TDMAframe cycle, known as the 26-multiframe. The FACCH has no allocation on the time slot- it relies on bit stealing.
51-Multiframe A second cycle, the 51-multiframe, is used for non-TCH combinations, including theBCCH. Due to their differing lengths, the start of the 51-multiframes becomes offset withrespect to the start of the 26-multiframes. During the resulting time interval, any MobileStation that is handling a call also monitors the surrounding cells. The signals that aremonitored from the surrounding cells are the SCH and FCCH signals. The surroundingcells can be synchronized or unsynchronized. Resulting measurements are sent to theBTS, then to the BSC, which uses them to assess the need for handover.
Superframe The 26 and 51-multiframes are themselves framed into superframes. Superframes aremade up of 51 sets of 26-multiframes or 26 sets of 51-multiframes.
Hyperframe Superframes are framed into hyperframes. A hyperframe consists of 2048 superframes.This enables every frame to be separately numbered over a period of approximately3 hours. All the frames are synchronized to the same timing schedule.
Transmit/ReceiveTiming
The Mobile Stations transmit the uplink three time slots later than the BTS transmits thedownlink (minus the transmission delay). Therefore, at any instant the Mobile Station needonly transmit or receive.
For further details of the Air Interface channel structure, refer to GSM rec. 05.01.
32 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
2 Channel Organization
2.5 Radio Resource ManagementAir Interface communication is managed in OSI-type layers. Although thereare seven layers in the OSI model, the BTS functions are concerned withonly the three lower layers.
2.5.1 Layer 3
Layer 3 radio resource functions provide general management of the AirInterface channels. The majority of the control processing is performed in theBSC, the BTS simply acting upon BSC commands.
2.5.1.1 Radio Channel SelectionThe BTS carries out free-channel interference measurements. These enablethe BSC to determine which channels are currently the most suitable foruse by both traffic and signalling.
2.5.1.2 Channel EstablishmentRadio Link Management and Channel State Control functions establish the AirInterface channels assigned by the BSC.
2.5.1.3 Handover PreparationA handover procedure can be initiated by the BSC to maintain or improve callquality once channels have been assigned. The same mechanism can alsobe used to optimize use of the network (e.g., reduce interference, alleviatelocal congestion, etc.). The handover procedure is based on measurementsmade at the Mobile Station and BTS.
The procedure can re-allocate the Air Interface channels used in the presentcell (intra-cell handover). It can also hand over the Mobile Station to a differentBTS and its associated cell (inter-cell handover). Handover is relevant to bothdedicated and common channels.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 33 / 234
2 Channel Organization
2.5.1.4 Dedicated Channel ManagementDedicated Channel Management functions control the radio communicationbetween the BTS and each Mobile Station. Some control is carried out in theBTS but overall management of the channels is under control of the BSC. Forthis purpose, the BSC makes use of measurements carried out for eachchannel in the Mobile Station and in the BTS.
Channel Management is handled as a Layer 3 function, using the RSL betweenthe BSC and the telecommunication functions. The RSL uses the LAPD.
The dedicated channel management functions are:
Power ControlIn order to minimize Mobile Station power consumption and co-channelinterference, the Mobile Station adjusts its transmit power to an acceptableminimum. The power level is based on uplink signal strength measurementsmade in the BTS.Similar measurements are made in the Mobile Station for the receivedsignal strength on the downlink. Measurement results are sent to the BTS,which sets the transmitter power output for each time slot. BCCH time slotsare transmitted at constant power.In GPRS systems there is no power control on the downlink. Uplink powercontrol is still performed by the Mobile Station, based on configurationparameters set by the MFS.
Timing AdvanceAs the distance between a Mobile Station and the BTS changes, bursttransmissions from the Mobile Station must remain aligned with the allocatedAir Interface time slots. Each Mobile Station therefore advances its bursttransmission time, to compensate for changes in the radio propagation delay.This advance is made relative to the basic schedule the Mobile Stationderives from received bursts. Timing advance changes for each MobileStation are calculated within the BTS, which sends them to the MobileStation on the SACCH twice every second.In GPRS systems the timing advance is transmitted from the BTS to theMobile Station every 26th TDMA frame via the PTCCH. The BTS alsocontrols the timing between the BTS and the MFS.
2.5.1.5 Common Channel ManagementCommon Channel Management functions use BCHs to handle shared controlcommunication between the BTS and Mobile Stations.
The common channel management functions are:
Channel RequestWhen an Mobile Station needs to access the network, it sends a randomaccess request to the BTS. The BTS sends the request to the BSC togetherwith reception measurements taken by the BTS.
Channel SchedulingChannel Scheduling ensures that Mobile Stations not carrying traffic,need only listen to the Air Interface at pre-determined time intervals. Thisminimizes power consumption.
2.5.1.6 Flow ControlThe Flow Control function raises an alarm at the BSC in the event of a BTSprocessor overload.
34 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
2 Channel Organization
2.5.2 Layer 2
The Air Interface Layer 2 functions handle the reliable transmission of speechand data frames between the BTS and Mobile Stations. The protocol used is avariant of LAPD known as LAPDm.
LAPDm transparently transfers complete messages, and handles automaticretransmission in the event of detected errors.
2.5.3 Layer 1
The Layer 1 functions handle the physical transmission of data over the AirInterface.
2.5.3.1 Modulation and DemodulationThe digital stream of downlink control and traffic data is used to modulate theRF carrier. The modulated carrier is then transmitted in the GSM RF band.A separate demodulator converts the uplink radio signals received from theMobile Stations back to digital form.
2.5.3.2 Multiframe SchedulingSignalling and traffic data is time interleaved. Each channel uses a single timeslot in successive or periodic TDMA frames.
2.5.3.3 Encoding and DecodingThese two functions are very similar in the way they process information.Decoding is essentially the reverse of Encoding.
Speech and data traffic, and data for signalling channels are encoded toproduce a string of TDMA bursts. These encoded bursts are transmitted overthe Air Interface. Encoding is achieved using a combination of convolutionaland block encoding.
The Decoding function processes uplink information and is applied afterdemodulation and de-interleaving. It produces a GSM-compliant bitstream byperforming a combination of convolutional and block decoding. Convolutionaldecoding is performed on all received channel types. Block decoding is appliedto Control Channels and TCH.
2.5.3.4 Encryption and DecryptionEncryption and Decryption protect the confidentiality of messages sent over theAir Interface. The baseband functions carry out Encryption and Decryption onTCHs and dedicated control channels only. Common channels are transmittedwithout encryption.
Encryption is implemented using the confidential A5 algorithm. Decryptionuses the same algorithm and is the reverse of Encryption.
2.5.3.5 Signal Strength and Signal Quality MeasurementsInformation about the signal quality and received signal strength of all channelsis sent to the BSC. The BSC uses this information to exercise Power Controland Handover functions. Both uplink and downlink channels are monitored forthis purpose.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 35 / 234
2 Channel Organization
2.5.3.6 Interleaving and De-interleavingInterleaving is applied to the encoded sub-blocks, to improve the errordetection rate. The baseband telecommunications functions are responsiblefor interleaving data for the downlink, and for de-interleaving data receivedon the uplink.
There are three interleaving processes:
Sub-block partitioning
Inter-block interleaving
Intra-burst interleaving.
All the logical channels follow this scheme, except that bursts carried by theBCCH are not interleaved.
2.6 SMS-CBThere are two mutually exclusive types of SMS-CB, simplified and complete.Each type is described in detail in the following sections.
2.6.1 Simplified SMS-CB
In the simplified version, the BTS places the broadcast messages in theTDMA frame structure.
These messages consist of four consecutive blocks.
The BTS uses the repetition frequency of broadcast commands on the AbisInterface together with some buffering mechanism to guarantee a proper
mapping of the psuedo-synchronous commands received from the BSConto the synchronous air interface.
The simplified version allows the continuous broadcast of one single
message on a per cell basis.
Messages are stored in the TCU.
The BSC sends broadcast messages to the BTS at the maximum repetition
rate of approximately once every 1.88 seconds.
The message scheduling is the responsibility of the OMC-R.
36 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
2 Channel Organization
2.6.2 Complete SMS-CB
The complete version is more complex. There are two types of CBCH, thebasic channel supported by the simplified SMS-CB, and the extended channelthat is needed to support the additional functions of the complete SMS-CB.
The complete SMS-CB uses both CBCH, basic and extended, to providedouble the channel capacity of the simplified SMS-CB. The basic CBCH isbroadcast within the first four multi-frames of the TDMA frame and the extendedCBCH is sent in the last four multi-frames.
The BTS:
Transmits the SMS-CB messages on the given CBCH under control from theBSC and transmits null messages when nothing is received from the BSC
Stores up to 150 message pages per cell. Multi-page messages can
be sent, with an assigned message priority. High priority messages arebroadcast in reserved time slots. Normal and background messages
are sent in the next free time slot
Reports CBCH or memory overload when the CBC request cannot besatisfied
Performs the scheduling broadcast on a per cell or CBCH basis as
requested by the CBC
Provides GSM phase 2 DRX to allow Mobile Station battery saving by
setting a last block bit in the SMS-CB message
Counts the number of broadcast-realized messages on a cell and channelbasis (used for billing purposes)
Reports to the CBC, after a Replace or Kill request, the number of
broadcasts realized for a message on a per cell basis for a given CBCHchannel
Provides a counting function to give the CBC loading information.
There are five SMS-CB cell states, Inactive, Idle, Configured, Operational,and Failure.
There are two SMS-CB message states:
Active, where the message is being broadcast
Realized, where all requested broadcasts have been performed.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 37 / 234
2 Channel Organization
38 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
3 Transmission Functions
3 Transmission Functions
This chapter describes how BTSs are linked to the BSC via the Abis Interface.After introducing the general arrangement, the chapter explains how data ismultiplexed to allow a single Abis Interface to service the full traffic capacity ofa BTS. The chapter includes a list of different options for implementing theAbis Interface at the physical layer.
Clock recovery is outlined, plus the alternative network configurations, and theGPRS transmission plane are described.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 39 / 234
3 Transmission Functions
3.1 Introduction to Transmission FunctionsTo minimize transmission costs, all uplink/downlink traffic and control databetween the BTS and BSC is carried on a single Abis Interface. This interfaceis supervised by transmission functions at the BTS and BSC.
Within the BTS the Abis Interface uses the following links to handle the transferof traffic and control data between the BTS transmission functions and theBTS components:
Data
LAPD RSL
LAPD OML.
The following figure shows a simplified block diagram of these interfacesand links.
BSCBTS
Transmission Functions
Transmission Functions
LAPD RSL
LAPD OML
Data
BTS Components
Abis Interface
Figure 6: BTS to BSC Transmission
3.2 Multiplexing SchemeEach baseband datastream through the BTS requires a transmission capacityon the Abis Interface of 128 kbit/s for traffic, and 64 kbit/s for signallingpurposes. Additionally the O&M function requires a 64 kbit/s channel.
The following sections describe how the multiplexing allows all BTS to BSCcommunications to be carried on a single interface.
3.2.1 Abis Interface
The 2 Mbit/s bandwidth of the Abis Interface is used as 32 time slots, each of64 kbits. These 32 time slots comprise one CCITT G703/704 frame.
Data on the Abis Interface uses the following Layer 2 protocols at submultiplexlevels:
LAPD RSL
LAPD OML
Q1 time slot.
The first time slot in each frame is reserved for G703/704 managementincluding the Q1 service interface. The remaining 31 time slots in each frameare used as described in the rest of this section.
40 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
3 Transmission Functions
3.2.1.1 Second Abis InterfaceWithout EDGE/EGPRS, the amount of information provided per Air interfacetime slot allowed to have the eight time slots of one TRX mapped onto two64 kbit/s time slots of the Abis interface (adding some time slots for signallingand O&M). Using this scheme, even a fully equipped BTS cabinet can beserved by one E1-interface (PCM30).
Introducing EGPRS, the amount of information provided by the time slots ofthe Air interface increases. If a BTS is fully equipped with TRXs, one E1-linkis no longer sufficient to carry all data between the BTS and BSC. With theintroduction of GPRS step 2 and EGPRS, the possibility to connect two E1-linksbetween BTS and BSC is added.
Introducing the Twin TRE module and the support of up to 24 TRXs per BTSthe need of resources is also increased so the posibility to connect a secondAbis is necessarry.
To support the second Abis link the Alcatel-Lucent™ BTS must be equippedwith SUMA/SUMX board.
Using two Abis links, OML and basic time slots are always mapped to the firstlink and the extra time slots for the TRX transmission pools are split overthe two Abis links.
Primary Abis Link
Secondary Abis Link
ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET
ET ET ET ETRSL BTBTRSL BTBTRSL BTBTRSL BTBTRSL BTBTOML
Extra Timeslot
Basic Timeslot
BTSBSC
BT
ET
Figure 7: Second Abis Interface, Time Slot Mapping
RSL with corresponding TCH and extra timeslots can be mapped over theprimary or secondary Abis link. RSL with corresponding TCH must be mappedon the same Abis link.
For a BTS with two Abis links the operator defines a new parameter:MAX_EXTRA_TS_PRIMARY, that is, the maximum number of extra time slotsthe system is allowed to allocate on the first Abis for this BTS.
To keep the maximum free time slots on the secondary Abis for another BTS,the allocation of extra time slots is done in priority on the first Abis until this Abisis full or MAX_EXTRA_TS_PRIMARY is reached.
To help the tuning of this parameter, the TSU occupancy is reported on demandto the operator and, in case of failed operation, the number of missing TCUresources is also reported.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 41 / 234
3 Transmission Functions
3.2.1.2 Second Abis SupervisionAs already done today, when the BTS detects a problem on the second Abis,it reports it to the BSC through the ‘fault indication’ message. In turn, theBSC translates this Abis message into an ‘alarm report’ message towardsthe OMC-R.
If the detected alarms on the second Abis link is one of the following:
BER-3
LOS
LFA
LMFA
AIS
RAI.
and it is either a BEGIN or an END (events are ignored), then the BTS informsthe BSC using the existing recovery message, but applied to another SBL. Therecovery message will contain the SBL Abis_HW_TP (N�2), correspondingto the second Abis.
Moreover, the recovery message with this SBL will be sent by the BTS, whenthere is an audit and at OMU/BTS reset, restart and init (if the Abis HighwayTP is not in service and the second Abis is used).
3.2.2 Multiplexing
On the downlink, the BSC transmission functions multiplex the data onto theAbis Interface. At the BTS the data is demultiplexed by the BTS transmissionfunctions.
The transmission functions for a single BTS provide connections for up to twoAbis Interfaces. This allows multiple BTSs to be connected to a single BSCusing chain or ring configurations.
The 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS has two separate 2 Mbit/s Abisinterfaces to allow for multidrop configurations.
Uplink data is multiplexed onto the Abis Interface by the BTS transmissionfunctions. The process used is similar to that employed by the BSC for downlinkdata. The mapping between the transmission functions and Abis links for bothuplink and downlink is programmable.
3.2.3 Signalling
Signalling frames are sent via the RSL between the BSC and the basebandfunctions, and via the OML between the BSC and the O&M functions.
One 64 kbit/s channel is allocated to each BTS baseband datastream forsignalling data. A similar 64 kbit/s channel is provided for the O&M function.
One RSL is required for each BTS carrier. Each RSL can be:
Multiplexed onto a separate 64 kbit/s time slot. This allows up to eight
carriers to be supported.
Static submultiplexed, which combines up to four RSLs into one 64 kbit/stime slot. This allows up to 12 carriers to be supported.
42 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
3 Transmission Functions
If up to 24 carriers must be supported in one BTS the static multiplexingsolution must be used.
3.2.4 Transmission O&M
The TSC regularly polls the BSS transmission equipment, including that atthe BTS. A service interface is therefore provided on the Abis Interface tocarry data for this function.
The Q1 service interface consists of a 16 kbit/s nibble, which uses part of thefirst time slot or part of one of the other time slots. Configuration rules exist toensure that room for the Q1 bus is always available. This applies even whena number of BTSs are connected to the Abis Interface. The BTSs can beattached in a chain or ring configuration.
3.2.5 Traffic
Time slots not used for signalling information are available to carry traffic. Forthis purpose, each 64 kbit/s time slot is divided into four 16 kbit/s nibbles.
For TCH/F, each nibble is dedicated to a single traffic channel for the duration ofa call. Each time slot is shared between four, full-rate TCHs - i.e., betweenfour different calls. Each carrier of the BTS thus requires two PCM time slotsfor its full capacity of eight TCH/F.
For TCH/H, each nibble can support two different traffic channels. Each timeslot is therefore shared between eight, half-rate TCHs - i.e., between eightdifferent calls. Each carrier of the BTS can carry sixteen TCH/H by usingtwo time slots.
3.2.6 Clock
Signals on the Abis Interface are normally synchronized to the PCM masterclock at the MSC. There is no separate line for the clock, which must thereforebe recovered from the signal at each receiver.
If a GPS receiver is installed, alternatively synchronization can be performed byusing the precise GPS clock.
3.2.7 Network Configuration
The network configurations for the 9100 BTS and 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E MicroBTS are different. These configurations are described in the following sections.
3.2.7.1 9100 BTS Configuration9100 BTSs can be connected to the BSC via star or multidrop (chain orring) configurations. Star connection is always used for high-capacity 9100BTSs which require all or most of the Abis Interface bandwidth. Since theintroduction of GPRS/EGPRS and the usage of the Twin TRE a second AbisInterface is supported by the BTS in order to provide better data flow. Chain orring architecture enables low-capacity 9100 BTSs to share the bandwidth ofan Abis connection.
In multidrop configurations, the Abis signal is routed through each 9100 BTS,where it is regenerated before being sent to the next equipment. If the 9100BTS is removed, the vacant Abis connector must be bridged to maintainAbis continuity.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 43 / 234
3 Transmission Functions
If the 9100 BTS is not powered, the routing of the Abis signal is performed byan internal relay which connects the input line to the output line. This passiveconnection allows the Abis signal to be routed to the next equipment.
44 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
3 Transmission Functions
3.2.7.2 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Configuration9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTSs can be connected to the BSC via amultidrop configuration. In multidrop configurations, the Abis signal is routedthrough the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS, where it is regenerated beforebeing sent to the next equipment.
If the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS is removed, is faulty, or is unpowered,an internal relay connects the input line to the output line. This passiveconnection allows the Abis signal to be routed to the next equipment.
3.3 Abis Interface Physical ConnectionFor indoor 9100 BTS, the 9100 BTS and BSC multiplexing equipment isnormally connected using dedicated cabling.
Other methods of Abis Interface connection can be used for outdoor BTSs,where the installation of dedicated cabling is not possible. In this case, controlof the transmission medium is in the hands of a third party.
Examples of this type of connection include:
Microwave LinkUsed where a line-of-sight radio path is available.
Leased Line (copper cable or fibre optic)Used where no line-of-sight link is available, or, where the distance betweenthe BSC and BTS is too great for microwave.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 45 / 234
3 Transmission Functions
3.3.1 Second Abis Topologies
The second Abis is interesting when there is not enough space on onecomplete Abis for all the BTS time slots. For a second Abis, the primary Abismust be fully assigned to the BTS. So the secondary Abis cannot be attachedto a BTS if the BTS is not alone on the primary Abis.
Only BTS with SUMA/SUMX boards or 9110-E Micro BTS support the secondAbis link. The BTS with a SUMP board has to be upgraded.
The baby board on the SUMA board that allows the BTS to manage fourAbis termination points is not used.
The SUMX can manage four Abis termination points without any additionalbaby board.
Without the baby board on the SUMA, a BTS can manage only two terminationpoints.
This implies that it is not possible to:
Connect a BTS in chain after a BTS with two Abis
Change the Abis from chain to ring if there is a BTS with two Abis
Attach a second Abis to a BTS that is not at the end of an Abis chain
Attach a second Abis to a BTS that is in an Abis ring.
Consequently, only two added Abis topologies are supported:
Primary Abis
Secondary Abis
BSCEVOLIUM
BTSTP1
TP2
Figure 8: Second Abis Interface, Topology 1
EVOLIUMBTS
BSC EVOLIUMBTS orG1/G2 BTS
EVOLIUMBTS orG1/G2 BTS
Primary Abis
Secondary AbisTP1
TP2TP1 TP1
TP2 TP2
Figure 9: Second Abis Interface, Topology 2
46 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
3 Transmission Functions
The primary Abis and the secondary Abis of a BTS can be on different TSU indifferent racks.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 47 / 234
3 Transmission Functions
3.3.2 No Cross Connect for Second Abis
There is no restriction regarding cross-connect on the primary Abis.
But, on the secondary Abis, because there is no RSL on this Abis, the faultmanagement of the link is based on transmission alarms. And as transmissionalarm propagation through a cross-connect is not assured, cross-connectsare not allowed on the second Abis. It is physically possible, but the systemdoes not and cannot check it.
EVOLIUMBTS
BSC
EVOLIUMBTS orG1/G2 BTS
TP1
TP2
CrossConnect
CrossConnect
CrossConnect
Primary Abis
Secondary Abis
TP1
TP2
Figure 10: Second Abis Interface, Cross Connect
48 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
3 Transmission Functions
3.4 GPRS Transmission PlaneThe GPRS transmission plane consists of a layered protocol structure. Thisstructure provides user information transfer, along with associated informationtransfer control procedures such as flow control, error detection, errorcorrection, and error recovery.
The independence of the transmission plane from the underlying Air interface ispreserved via the GB.
The signalling plane consists of protocols for control and support of thetransmission plane functions for controlling:
GPRS network access connections, such as attaching/detaching from
the GPRS network
Attributes of an established network access connection, such as activationof a PDP address
The routing path of an establish network access connection, in order tosupport user mobility
Assignment of network resources to meet changing user demands and
providing supplementary services.
The following figure shows the functional layout of the protocol layer.
SNDCP
GMM/SM
LLC
RRM
RLCMAC
GSM RF
MSTS
GSM RF
BTS
L2−GCH
L1−GCHL2−RSL
L1−RSL
Abis/Ater
Abis
L2−GSL
L1−GSL
L2−RSL
L1−RSL
BSSGPRR
BSC
MFS
L2−GCH
L1−GCH FRL2−GSL
L1−GSL
Ater
RRM
NS
to SGSN
BSSGPRLCMAC
BSSGP
Figure 11: GPRS Transmission and Signalling Planes
This protocol layer is composed of the following elements, in relation to the BTS.
Relay - relays the RLC PDUs between the L1 Ater and Um interfaces
L1-RSL - the physical layer between the BSC and the BTS using 64 or16 kbit/s channels
L2-RSL - a LAPD protocol between the BSC and the BTS.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 49 / 234
3 Transmission Functions
For user data traffic and CCCH signalling when the GPRS is present, the BSCis transparent and lines are replaced with GCH lines as follows:
L1-GCH - the physical layer between the MFS and BTS which uses the
synchronous mode of transmission
L2-GCH - a simple proprietary protocol between the MFS and the BTS for
synchronization and channel activation.
50 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
This chapter describes the baseband telecommunications functions.
These are divided into the following categories:
Baseband Processing functions
Call Management functions
Supervisory and Control functions.
The chapter breaks down each category into individual functions, andexplains how these work together to prepare the downlink baseband data fortransmission over the Air Interface. The chapter also explains how the processis reversed for uplink data.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 51 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.1 Introduction to Telecommunication Functions - BasebandThe baseband telecommunication functions adapt the downlink terrestrialbitstream to the format required for transmission over the Air Interface. Onthe uplink, the process is reversed.
The three categories of the baseband telecommunication function aredescribed in the following sections.
4.2 Baseband ProcessingBaseband processing consists of several functions shown in the following figureand described in the following sections.
RF Transmission Encryption Channel
Encoding Rate Adaptation
RF Functions
Downlink Direction
Terrestrial Traffic
RF Reception
Channel Decoding
De−interleavingDecryption
Interleaving
Uplink Direction *
Baseband Functions
De−modulation
Transmission and Transcoder Functions
To/From Mobile−services Switching Center
* Some uplink functions are duplicated for Antenna Diversity.
Duplexing
Speech Transcoding
Rate Adaptation
Speech Transcoding
Figure 12: Baseband Telecommunication Functions
4.2.1 Speech Transcoding
TC functions are logically assigned to the BTS. The TC is physically locatedbetween the MSC and the BSC. It is connected to the BTS, via the BSC usingthe Abis Interface. The TC performs speech transcoding and rate adaptation onthe TCHs in both downlink and uplink directions.
Speech transcoding is performed on speech traffic only. The process isdescribed in the following sections.
52 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.2.1.1 Speech TrafficFor downlink speech traffic, two separate processes are carried out on full-rateand half-rate speech. These processes are, two-stage speech transcoding,and bit-reordering. The bitstream is then passed to the Channel Encodingfunction as a sequence of blocks.
The speech transcoding process is shown in the following figure.
64 kbit/s 8 kbit/s 16 kbit/s
6.5 kbit/s 13 kbit/sChannel
Encoding
GSM rec. 04.21GSM rec. 08.60 GSM rec. 06.10 TCH/FGSM rec. 06.20 TCH/H
Abis Channel
RAS is a GSM−specified rate adaptation
Encoding Function TC Function
RASSpeech
Transcoding
Figure 13: Speech Transcoding for Speech Traffic
4.2.1.2 Correspondence Between Traffic and Channel TypesThe following table shows the relationship between the Speech Traffic Type,the Air Interface Rate and the possible channel types. The table applies toTCH/F and TCH/H channel types.
Speech Traffic Type Air Interface Rate (kbit/s) Possible Channel Types
Full-rate Speech 13 TCH/F Speech
Half-rate Speech 6.5 TCH/H Speech
Table 5: Correspondence Table of Speech Transcoding
4.2.1.3 Bit Re-orderingIn addition to speech transcoding, another process is performed on speechtraffic. This is the process of bit re-ordering. Bit re-ordering is necessarybecause individual bits in the encoded speech can make an unequalcontribution to the subjective speech quality. Re-ordering enables bits tobe given the protection of parity and/or convolutional encoding, accordingto their importance.
Bit re-ordering can be performed by the TC or the baseband functions. Theremote location of the TC introduces an overhead in transmission time viathe Abis link. This increases the importance of minimizing speech codingand decoding delays.
To minimize delays, speech bit re-ordering is carried out by the basebandfunctions. This enables the TC to start sending partly coded data on thedownlink, before finishing the coding of a speech frame. Bit re-ordering cantherefore start in the BTS without waiting for the TC to finish processing thecomplete frame.
On the uplink, the processes of speech transcoding and bit- re-ordering areeffectively reversed. This recovers the original bitstream from the MobileStation’s transmission.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 53 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.2.2 Rate Adaptation
The rate adaptation function adapts the TC data rate to the speech frame formatused on the Air Interface. Rate adaptation is performed on data traffic only.
Rate adaptation is the process of modifying the bitstream and changing thedata rate between the TC and the Air Interface (or vice-versa). This mechanismforms an essential part of the Layer 1 interface between the two differentbaseband coding schema used by the Air Interface and the terrestrial link. Rateadaptation is applied only to TCHs carrying data.
The responsibilities for carrying out rate adaptation are shared between thebaseband functions and the TC.
The process of rate adaptation is described in the following sections.
4.2.2.1 Data TrafficIn the downlink direction, V.110 data frames received by the TC are adapted ina three-stage process to one of three possible Air Interface rates.
The data traffic rate adaptation process is shown in the following figure.
64 kbit/s 16 kbit/s8 kbit/s
3.6 kbit/s6 kbit/s12 kbit/s14.5 kbit/s
Channel Encoding
GSM rec. 08.60GSM rec. 04.21 GSM rec. 08.54
RA2, RAA and RA1/RA1’ are GSM−specified rate adaptations
TC Function
RA1/RA1’
RA2
GSM rec. 04.21
16 kbit/s RAA
RAA
Encoding Function
Figure 14: Rate Adaptation for Data Traffic
The Air Interface uses the lowest rate compatible with the current user datarate. This arrangement allows the maximum level of redundancy to beintroduced into the bitstream.
For TCH/F, the Air Interface rates of 14.5, 12, 6 or 3.6 kbit/s support userdata rates of:
14400 bit/s
9600 bit/s
4800 bit/s
2400 bit/s
1200 bit/s
600 bit/s
300 bit/s.
User rates below 2400 bit/s are rate-adapted to 2400 bits/s by simple bitrepetition. As a result, the Encoder only has to support four user data rates:14.4, 9.6, 4.8 or 2.4 kbit/s.
Rate adaptation in the uplink direction is essentially a reverse of processingcarried out on data traffic for the downlink.
54 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.2.2.2 Correspondence Between Data RatesThe following table shows the relationship between the User Data Rate, theIntermediate Data Rate, the Air Interface Rate and the possible channel types.The table applies to TCH/F channel types only.
User DataRate (bit/s)
Intermediate DataRate (kbit/s)
Air InterfaceRate (kbit/s)
PossibleChannelTypes
300 8 3.6 TCH/F2.4
600 8 3.6 TCH/F2.4
1200 8 3.6 TCH/F2.4
2400 8 3.6 TCH/F2.4
4800 8 6 TCH/F4.8
9600 16 12 TCH/F9.6
14400 16 14.5 TCH/F14.4
Table 6: Correspondence Table of Rate Adaptation
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 55 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.2.2.3 Packet-switched TrafficGPRS was implemented in order to enable data transmission at a bit rateexceeding the capabilities of GSM. Basically, GPRS relies on new codingschema on the Air interface that allow a higher data throughput.
HSDS supports GPRS with the CS-1 to CS-4 coding schema and EGPRS withthe MCS1 to MCS9 coding schema.
The following table gives the data rates based on the different coding schema.
Scheme Modulation Maximum rate [kbps]per radio TS basis
CS-4 GMSK 21.4
CS-3 GMSK 15.6
CS-2 GMSK 13.4
CS-1 GMSK 9.05
EGPRS was implemented in order to enable data transmission at a bit rateexceeding the capabilities of GPRS. Basically, EGPRS relies on new modulationand coding schema on the Air interface allowing for a data throughput optimizedwith respect to radio propagation conditions (’Link Adaptation’).
The basic principle of link adaptation is to change the Modulation and CodingSchema (MCS) according to the radio conditions. When the radio conditionsworsen, a more protected MCS (more redundancy) is chosen, leading to a lowerthroughput. On the contrary, when the radio conditions become better, a lessprotected MCS (less redundancy) is chosen, leading to a higher throughput.
Nine modulation and coding schema are proposed for EGPRS, providingraw RLC data rates ranging from 8.8 kbit/s (minimum value under the worstradio propagation conditions per time slot) up to 59.2 kbit/s (maximum valueachievable per time slot under the best radio propagation conditions). Datarates above 17.6 kbit/s require that 8-PSK modulation be used on the Airinterface, instead of the regular GMSK.
56 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
The following table shows the data rates based on coding scheme andmodulation type.
Scheme Modulation Maximum rate [kbps]per radio TS basis
MCS-9 8-PSK 59.2
MCS-8 8-PSK 54.4
MCS-7 8-PSK 44.8
MCS-6 8-PSK 29.6
MCS-5 GMSK 22.4
MCS-4 GMSK 17.6
MCS-3 GMSK 14.8
MCS-2 GMSK 11.2
MCS-1 GMSK 8.8
: Note that the maximum data rate given in the above table refers to the RLCpayload (= the throughput offered to the Logical Link Control ’LLC) layer). TheRLC/MAC header, Block Check Sequence (BCS), Tail bit etc. are alreadysubtracted.
Table 7: Data Rates for Different Modulation and Coding Schema
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 57 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.2.3 Channel Encoding and Decoding
These two functions are very similar in the way they process information.Channel Decoding is essentially the reverse of Channel Encoding.
4.2.3.1 Channel EncodingChannel Encoding is the baseband processing implemented by the channelencoding algorithm, as defined in GSM rec. 05.03, version 5.2.0 or later.
Data for Channel Encoding is received from the Speech Transcoding or RateAdaptation function (speech and data traffic), and from the upper OSI layers(data for signalling channels). From these inputs, the Channel Encodingfunction produces a string of encoded TDMA bursts for transmission over theAir Interface. The resulting bursts can also carry information for internal BTScontrol and test purposes.
Channel Encoding is achieved using a combination of convolutional and blockencoding. Convolutional encoding produces a greater number of output bitsthan there are input bits. Applying convolutional encoding to reorderedspeech bits enables the most important bits to be given the protection of ahigh level of redundancy.
Four types of burst are encoded:
Normal Burst (encoded) which is used on the traffic and signalling channels
Synchronization Burst (encoded) which is used on the SCH
Frequency Correction Burst (fixed pattern) which is used on the FCCH
Dummy Burst (fixed pattern) which is used for empty BCCH time slots andunused TCH time slots.
4.2.3.2 Channel DecodingThe Channel Decoding function processes uplink information. ChannelDecoding is left largely to the system manufacturer, but is essentially thereverse of encoding.
A BTS configured for antenna diversity provides two receive paths, allowinguplink signals from two separate antennae to be processed. Each incomingtime slot has two uplink signals which are combined in the Channel Decoder.
For traffic and signalling received in the uplink, Channel Decoding is appliedafter demodulation and de-interleaving. Channel Decoding is essentially thereverse of Channel Encoding. It produces a GSM-compliant bitstream ready forSpeech Transcoding or Rate Adaptation and onward routing to the terrestrialpath. This is done by a combination of convolutional and block decoding.
Convolutional decoding is performed on all received channel types, and isachieved by applying the Viterbi algorithm.
Block decoding is applied to Control Channels and TCH, both full and half-rate.It uses a dedicated routine defined in GSM rec. 05.03 for Channel Decoding.
58 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.2.4 Interleaving/De-interleaving
Interleaving is applied to the channel-encoded sub-blocks, to improve the errordetection rate. The baseband telecommunications functions are responsiblefor interleaving data for the downlink, and for de-interleaving data receivedon the uplink.
The interleaving process can be divided into the following three processes.All the logical channels follow this scheme, except that bursts carried by theBCCH are not interleaved.
1. Sub-block PartitioningThe first stage in the interleaving process is to split the encoded bits of aspeech or data channel into sub-blocks. These can be partitioned intofurther sub-blocks depending on the type of channel. Sub-blocks are thentransmitted within the TDMA frame structure as defined by the inter-blockinterleaving scheme, summarized in the following description.
2. Inter-block InterleavingInterleaving of the sub-blocks is diagonal for TCH and FACCH, or rectangularfor signalling channels. The effect of these two types of interleaving is toenable blocks to be mapped onto bursts according to the channel type.
3. Intra-burst InterleavingIntra-burst interleaving is achieved by distributing the interleaved sub-blocksover a number of bursts.
4.2.5 Encryption/Decryption
Encryption and Decryption are optional security functions that protect theconfidentiality of messages sent over the Air Interface. When Encryptionis used, the baseband functions carry out Encryption and Decryption ontraffic channels and dedicated control channels. Common channels must betransmitted without encryption. This is because a cipher key is dedicated toeach individual call, and this key is not known to the Mobile Station until theinitial stages of call establishment are underway.
The following three processes are used for message confidentiality.
Encryption Encryption is implemented using the confidential A5 algorithm, specified inaccordance with GSM rec. 03.20.
Three versions of this algorithm are used:
A5/1 which performs the most secure level of encryption
A5/2 which performs a level of encryption effective for normal use, butwhich is less secure than that provided by A5/1
A5/0 which performs no encryption.
The implementation of the A5 algorithm is not dependent on the BTShardware. The A5/1 and A5/2 (cipher key) must be downloaded to the BTS,from the BSC, before Encryption can start.
Decryption Decryption uses the same algorithms as those used for Encryption. Decryptionis the reverse of Encryption.
TDMA MultiframeBuilding
On the downlink, the encrypted bursts are finally multiplexed to build the TDMAmultiframes, before being sent to the RF telecommunications functions.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 59 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.2.6 Demodulation
Demodulation recovers the baseband data contained in the radio signalreceived in the uplink direction.
The RF telecommunication functions remove the RF carrier and producecomplex samples of the digital baseband. These samples are sent to thebaseband functions, where the GMSK demodulation is performed. At thisstage, the Demodulation function applies frequency correction to compensatefor frequency drift at the Mobile Station.
In addition a number of measurements are made on the uplink signal to provideinformation required by the BSC for control purposes.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio SNR measurements are made by the Demodulation function as part of thesignal processing. The resulting values are also used by the BSC to optimizechannel allocation.
Adaptive FrameAlignment
TOA estimation measures the propagation delay over the Air Interface, asMobile Station to BTS distances change.
Using TOA measurements, the BTS calculates timing advance changes foreach Mobile Station. This is done by measuring the time offset between itsown burst transmission and the reception of Mobile Station bursts.
The timing advance data is sent on the SACCH to the Mobile Station. TheMobile Station then advances its burst transmissions relative to the burstsit receives from the BTS. Two such updates per second enable the MobileStation to keep its burst transmissions synchronized to the allotted time slots.The overall process is known as Adaptive Frame Alignment.
When a Mobile Station is switched on or otherwise enters a service area, theTOA is initially estimated using the Random Access burst. The BTS measuresthe position of the received burst within the Burst Period and its Guard Period.
Soft Decision Bits The Viterbi algorithm is used in the Decoder function. It requires theinformation produced by Demodulation of a burst to be supplied in a formatknown as soft decision bits. The demodulated bursts are therefore outputin the form of soft decision samples.
60 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.3 Call Management FunctionsThe baseband telecommunications functions participate in several CallManagement functions, described in the following sections.
4.3.1 Radio Link Recovery
The Radio Channel Management function detects the need for radio linkrecovery when communication with a Mobile Station is lost. Radio link recoveryconsists of maximizing the transmitter power at the BTS and Mobile Station.If the recovery procedure fails, this is recognized by the BSC as a radio linkfailure. The situation can then be handled by the network in an orderly manner.This mechanism is based on signal strength values and quality parametersprovided by the baseband telecommunication functions.
4.3.2 Radio Resource Indication
The quality of a radio channel can change very quickly, due to the movement ofMobile Stations. For this reason, the best channel currently available cannot bepredicted for more than a few seconds. To ensure that channels are allocatedin the most effective manner at a given moment, idle channels are continuouslymonitored by the BTS. The measurements on which this mechanism is basedare performed by the baseband telecommunication functions.
4.3.3 Paging
The Paging function is used to find a Mobile Station. For this purpose theBSC first determines the Paging Group to be used. This is based on theInternational Mobile Subscriber Identity, or Temporary Mobile SubscriberIdentity, of the Mobile Station to be paged. The Paging Group value is thensent to the BTS with a paging request message.
The baseband telecommunication functions do this by using the Paging Groupinformation to construct PCH messages.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 61 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.3.4 Discontinuous Transmission
DTX is an option in accordance with GSM rec. 06.31. It is designed toreduce co-channel interference between cells, and to cut power consumptionin Mobile Stations.
On the downlink TCH, a VAD algorithm in the TC analyzes input speech. Ifmore than four successive speech frames are detected without speech activity,the TC can perform DTX.
If DTX is performed, it is controlled by the BSC. During DTX, an SID frame issent to the Mobile Station at the start of every speech inactivity period. FurtherSID frames are sent at 480 ms intervals thereafter, for as long as the inactivityperiod lasts. This compares with 20 ms intervals between normal speechframes, so the number of bursts transmitted is greatly reduced. This patternis modified by constraints to ensure that DTX does not prevent valid signalmeasurements being made in the BTS.
During a silent period the frame level functions encode dummy bursts for thetransmitter. This stops TCH radio transmission when there is no useful traffic totransmit. However, DTX is overridden when FACCH data needs to be sent.
DTX is not applied to TCHs transmitted by the BCCH transmitter, since GSMprotocol requires continuous BCCH transmission. In this case, a dummy burstis transmitted when the FDMA time slot is on the BCCH frequency. The BTSapplies the transmitter power value of the BCCH carrier to the transmitteddummy burst.
The SID frames tell the Mobile Station when to listen to the TCH. They alsoenable the Mobile Station to generate ’comfort noise’ during the silence periods.This prevents the caller from thinking that the call has been disconnected.
DTX can be used on both uplink and downlink. If it is used on the uplink, theChannel Decoder distinguishes between speech frames and SIDs on thebasis of the frame content. The Channel Decoder uses SID flags to controlthe speech decoding.
4.3.5 Discontinuous Reception
The BTS supports the GSM option of DRX by Mobile Stations. When DRXis used, the downlink CCCH is divided into a number of PCH sub-channels.This allows all paging messages for a particular Mobile Station to be sent onthe same sub-channel. Each Mobile Station can determine this channel frominformation sent on the CCCH. When idle, the Mobile Station needs listenonly to the relevant sub-channel. Since this contains only a small sub-set ofall the PCH frames, the technique results in a significant saving in powerconsumption by the Mobile Station.
When DRX is used, the telecommunication functions continue to receive signalstrength measurements from Mobile Stations. These measurements are madeby the Mobile Station during the associated paging block duration.
62 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.3.6 Quality Measurement
To exercise Power Control and Handover functions, the BSC uses informationabout the signal quality and RSSI for all channels. Both uplink and downlinkchannels are monitored for this purpose. This function is supported by the BTSin accordance with GSM rec. 05.08.
For a given channel, the RF functions measure the received signal strengthon the uplink. These are sent to the baseband functions every TDMA frame.Here, the Decoder constructs the received signal quality for every block,then averages the values. These values are used by the Power Control andHandover functions.
4.3.7 Power Control
The RF power radiated by Mobile Stations and the BTS is controlled by theBSC. This minimizes co-channel interference and conserves battery powerat the Mobile Station. On the uplink, the BTS measures the signal strengthand signal quality received from the Mobile Station as previously described.For the downlink, the BTS acquires the equivalent values from the MobileStation via the SACCH.
These measurements are processed by the BSC, which sends power controlvalues to the BTS via Layer 3. The Channel Encoding function routes this datato the RF telecommunications functions or Mobile Station, as relevant.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 63 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.4 Supervisory and Control FunctionsThe Supervisory and Control functions are described in the following sections.
4.4.1 Clock Distribution
The Clock Distribution function distributes all clocks required by the basebandfunctions. Clocks are derived from the Timing Generation function.
4.4.2 Protocol Management
In order to carry out its telecommunications and O&M functions, the basebandtelecommunications function manages protocols corresponding to OSILayers 1, 2 and 3. For each layer it is possible to find more than one protocol- for example, there are three Layer 2 protocols: LAPD, LAPDm, and theBTS internal links.
4.4.3 Radio Channel Management
Radio Channel Management is based on decisions made by the BSC. Thesedecisions are implemented within the BTS, which effectively reacts to BSCcommands. This arrangement requires a constant exchange of signallingmessages between the BSC and the Mobile Station. These messages arehandled using the GSM rec. 08.58 and 04.08 protocols.
Within this mechanism, the baseband function is responsible for routingtransparent messages, and for processing non-transparent messages beforerouting them. These activities are handled by the baseband Layer 3 functions,which play a key role in managing the Air Interface and its channels.
The measurements are preprocessed in the BTS and sent via Layer 3 to theBSC. Radio channels can then be re-allocated by the BSC depending on thecurrent measurement results. Radio Channel Management is required forboth dedicated channels and CCCH.
In GPRS systems, channel management is carried out from the MFS viathe master PDCH.
64 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
4.4.4 Transcoder Time Alignment
The multiframe organization of TCHs dictates that speech blocks for the AirInterface can start only at predefined points in time. Since each speech blockcorresponds to 20 ms of speech, an asynchronous entity in the downlinkspeech path can lead to a delay of up to 20 ms.
To avoid this difficulty, the TC is told the precise points in time to send TRAUframes to the BTS.
This function, known as Transcoder Time Alignment, is implemented by thetelecommunication functions in accordance with GSM recommendations:
08.60 for TCH/F
08.61 for TCH/H.
The baseband functions measure the shift between the ideal point in time toreceive a frame from the TC, and the actual time of arrival. This involvesmeasuring the delay between reception of the TRAU frames and the encodingof a speech block. The resulting value is sent by the BTS to the TC, whichadjusts its schedule accordingly.
For each data stream, the baseband functions provide control and basebanddata processing for the eight time slots that comprise one TDMA frame.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 65 / 234
4 Telecommunication Functions - Baseband
66 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
This chapter describes the RF telecommunication functions. Following a briefintroduction, the chapter discusses RF functions under the headings:
RF processing
Control functions
Coupling functions.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 67 / 234
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.1 Introduction to Telecommunication Functions - RFThe RF telecommunication functions convert downlink databursts into amodulated RF carrier, for transmission over the Air Interface.
On the uplink, the functions receive incoming GSM radio signals from theAir Interface. They then convert them into samples suitable for basebandprocessing.
The following figure shows the RF functions for BTSs with frequency hoppingusing programmable carrier frequencies.
GMSK Modulation
Power Amplification
Power Coupling
and Detection
Control
Downlink Direction
Uplink Direction
Up−conversion
RF Functions Baseband Functions
Frequency Generator
Baseband Downlink Processing
Coupling
Down− conversion
Signal Amplification
A−D Conversion
Digital Pre−processing
* Antenna Diversity − some uplink functions are duplicated for Antenna Diversity.
*
Frequency Hopping
Baseband Uplink Processing
Frequency Generator
Figure 15: RF Telecommunication Functions
Frequency hopping is achieved by controlling the transmitter and receiverfrequency generators. The generators are programmed to a different frequencyfor successive TCH time slots. Refer to Frequency Hopping (Section 5.2.2)for more information.
68 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.2 RF ProcessingRF processing consists of the following functions.
5.2.1 RF Carrier Generation
A 9100 BTS can be configured for up to eight discrete RF carriers for anomnidirectional configuration and for up to twelve discrete RF carriers in caseof a sectorized configuration. Each carrier supports up to eight full-rate or 16half-rate GSM channels. A 9110 Micro BTS can be configured for up to sixdiscrete RF carriers and a 9110 Micro BTS-E can be configured for up to twelvediscrete RF carriers for a sectorized configuration.
Each RF carrier is generated:
At constant frequency - each transmitter sends successive time slots on aconstant carrier frequency. This is produced by a frequency synthesizer.
At a programmed frequency - the synthesizer is reprogrammed for eachtime slot.
In both cases, the BCCH is transmitted at a constant frequency. The frequencysynthesizer is reprogrammed at a constant frequency for successive BCCHtime slots.
5.2.2 Frequency Hopping
Frequency hopping is the optional process of transmitting successive time slotsof an GSM channel, on different carrier frequencies. The carrier frequency isspecified by the ARFCN, under control of the FHA.
Frequency hopping reduces the effects of multipath distortion and co-channelinterference between cells. It is applied only to the TCHs and SDCCH, sincethe BCCH must be transmitted on a constant carrier frequency.
Frequency Hopping is performed on traffic transmitted over the Air Interface.The process is described for the downlink and uplink directions.
5.2.2.1 Downlink DirectionWhen frequency hopping is in use, traffic that is to be transmitted to MobileStations is frequency hopped. The BTS transmitters are tuned by frequencysynthesizers which are programmed to produce different frequencies. Whenfrequency hopping is not used, the synthesizers are set to a constant frequency.
The frequency synthesizer operation determines the way in which the BTSprocesses the traffic to be transmitted:
Programmable frequency synthesizerFrequency hopping is achieved by programming the synthesizers to adifferent frequency for successive TCH time slots. The BCCH synthesizeris programmed only once, during power up or following a change in theARFCN.
Frequency synthesizer set to a constant frequencyWhen frequency hopping is switched off, the TCH frequency synthesizersare repeatedly re-programmed for the same ARFCN. The BCCH synthesizeris programmed only once, during power up or following a change in theARFCN.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 69 / 234
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.2.2.2 Uplink DirectionWhen frequency hopping is in use, traffic from Mobile Stations is frequencyhopped. The BTS receivers are tuned by frequency synthesizers which areprogrammed to produce different frequencies. When frequency hopping is notused, the synthesizers are set to a constant frequency.
The frequency synthesizer operation determines the way in which the BTSprocesses the received TCH:
Programmable frequency synthesizerA receiver with a programmable frequency synthesizer is retuned, undercontrol of the FHA, for each time slot. Each receiver therefore preserves theoriginal TDMA frame content, and with it the cyclic data that comprises theassociated TCHs. This type of receiver provides a contiguous datastream,which can be passed directly to the telecommunications baseband functions.
Frequency synthesizer set to a constant frequencyA receiver tuned by a frequency synthesizer set to produce a constantfrequency, receives uplink signals on a single frequency. Successive,frequency hopped, bursts sent by a single Mobile Station are thereforereceived by different receivers. To enable the telecommunications basebandfunctions to process the uplink TCHs, the received bursts are switched,under control of the FHA, to remotely reassemble the original TDMA frames.
5.2.3 Modulation and Up-Conversion
Modulation and up-conversion are described in the following sections.
5.2.3.1 ModulationDownlink data is received by the RF telecommunication functions in the formof encoded bursts. Both the GMSK and 8-PSK modulation functions convertthe downlink data into two baseband signals I and Q. The data is differentiallyencoded, and digital values are generated from a sine and cosine look-up table.The digital values are converted to analog signals, amplified and filtered, toform the baseband signals I and Q.
The I and Q signals are used to modulate the RF carrier. The downlink signal isthen ready for amplification.
The figure below shows the I and Q baseband signals for 8-PSK.
70 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.2.3.2 Coding Schema
Scheme Modulation Code rate Maximum rate[kbps]
EGPRS MCS-9 8-PSK 1 59.2
MCS-8 8-PSK 0.92 54.4
MCS-7 8-PSK 0.76 44.8
MCS-6 8-PSK 0.49 29.6
MCS-5 8-PSK 0.37 22.4
MCS-4 GMSK 1 17.6
MCS-3 GMSK 0.8 14.8
MCS-2 GMSK 0.66 11.2
MCS-1 GMSK 0.53 8.8
GPRS CS-4 GMSK 1 20
CS-3 GMSK 0.75 14.4
CS-2 GMSK 0.66 12
CS-1 GMSK 0.5 8
Note : The maximum data rate given in the above table refers to the RLC payload (=the throughput offered to the Logical Link Control (LLC) layer). The RLC/MACheader, Block Check Sequence (BCS), Tail bit etc. are already subtracted.
The choice of the modulation and coding scheme is based on measurements ofthe Bit Error Probability (BEP). The highest packet data throughput that canbe achieved for Carrier-to-Interference Ratio (CIR) values is in excess of 20dB, which corresponds to a clear radio path. (GSM radio network planningis done with the objective of meeting CIR values at least equal to 9 dB.)Numerical simulations indicate that, on average, EGPRS would enable a datathroughput twice as large as what can be obtained with GPRS (with all fourcoding schema), that is roughly 35 kbit/s/time slot.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 71 / 234
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.2.4 Power Amplification and Power Control
Power amplification and power control for GMSK and 8-PSK are describedbelow.
5.2.4.1 GMSK Output PowerPower Amplification boosts the RF signal in several stages to the requiredoutput power. Output power for each transmitter is constantly monitored,and set to a level specified for each time slot. The power level is controlledby the Power Step parameter, which is included in the downlink signallingfrom the BSC.
The TCH carrier output power can vary dynamically for each burst, and isramped up or down as necessary. The BCCH carrier output power remainsat a constant level, but is nevertheless controlled by the Power Step for eachdiscrete time slot.
Power Amplification is temperature limited. If the temperature of the RF powerstage exceeds a pre-defined limit, the RF output power is switched OFF and analarm is sent to the O&M function.
The Power Step parameter also controls the Power Amplifier switches. Theseenable/disable the PA output power for the TCH and BCCH carriers.
During normal operation, each carrier is enabled for the active period of eachtime slot. This leaves a guard period between time slots, during which nocarrier is transmitted.
During startup, the TCH and BCCH carriers can be suppressed for individualtime slots. The same suppression is applied while alarms are in force, orduring unused time slots.
TRE1: Max 8−PSKoutput power
TRE2: Max 8−PSKoutput power
Transmission GMSKoutput powerof the sector
TRE outputpower
8−PSK delta powerfor TRX2
Figure 16: GMSK Output Power
72 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.2.4.2 8-PSK Output PowerThe nominal output power of the transmitters is specified as the average powerduring the active part of the burst. In GMSK, the average power is identical tothe peak power (ignoring imperfections like overshoots and ripples). In 8-PSK,even though the peak power is the same as in GMSK, the average power islower than the GMSK power. This is sometimes called ’power back off’. Thispower back off is theoretically about 4.8 dB assuming the same peak poweras for GMSK and a random bit pattern. In reality, transmitters are often notlimited by the ability to deliver instant power peaks, but by thermal constraints.In that case, it is therefore possible to increase the peak power for 8-PSKwithout violating the thermal limits.
For a given TRE, the maximum output power is lower in 8-PSK than in GMSKbecause of the 8-PSK modulation envelope which requires a quasi-linearamplification. The TRE transmit power in 8-PSK cannot exceed the GMSKtransmit power in the sector and in the band. In 8-PSK, the only levelling whichapplies aligns, if necessary, the 8-PSK transmit power to the GMSK transmitpower in the sector and in the band. In the figure below, an attenuation isapplied to the 8-PSK output power of TRE1 in order to align it with the GMSKoutput power of the sector. No attenuation is necessary for the output powerof TRE2.
TRE1: Max 8−PSKoutput power
TRE2: Max 8−PSKoutput power
Transmission GMSKoutput powerof the sector
TRE outputpower
Figure 17: 8-PSK Output Power
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 73 / 234
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.2.4.3 Determination of 8-PSK Delta PowerThe 8-PSK delta power informs the system of the difference between theGMSK output power of the sector and the 8-PSK output power that can bereached by a given TRE. It takes into account all the attenuations exceptthe static power reduction.
The figure below shows the 8-PSK delta power for TRE2. For TRE1, the8-PSK delta power is ’0’.
TRE1: Max 8−PSKoutput power
TRE2: Max 8−PSKoutput power
Transmission GMSKoutput powerof the sector
TRE outputpower
8−PSK delta powerfor TRX2
Figure 18: 8-PSK Delta Power
5.2.5 Channel Selection and Conversion
Incoming signals are received via the antennae and coupling functions. For the9100 BTS, the receivers are always configured for diversity reception.
Each receiver is tuned by a programmable frequency synthesizer. Thesynthesizer is programmable, re-tuning the receiver to the channel frequencyfor each discrete time slot.
The incoming GMSK-modulated RF signal is filtered to suppress interferencefrom outside the selected frequency. The RF signal is then mixed with theoscillator/synthesizer signal to down-convert the required signal into anintermediate frequency. The channel number is selected by an O&M commandwhich is sent to the control function of the transmitter.
A 9100 BTS can be configured with up to eight receivers in an omni-directionalconfiguration or 12 receivers in a sectorized configuration. Using the TwinTRE 16 receivers are supported in an omni-directional configuration or 24 inreceivers in a sectorized configuration. Each receiver can process up to eightfull-rate or 16 half-rate GSM channels.
A 9110 Micro BTS can be configured with up to a maximum of 6 receivers anda 9110 Micro BTS-E can be configured with up to a maximum of 12 receivers ina sectorized configuration. Each receiver can process up to eight full-rate or16 half-rate GSM channels.
5.2.6 Signal Amplification
The receiver filters and amplifies the intermediate frequency signal. This signalis then split into two paths, high and low gain. Using a second local oscillatorsignal, I/Q demodulators down-convert the high and low gain intermediate
74 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
frequency signals to baseband I and Q components. These are ready forA-D conversion.
5.2.7 A-D Conversion
The receiver A-D converts the high and low gain I and Q signals into a digitalrepresentation. Either the high gain or the low gain path is selected, dependingon signal strength. This increases the dynamic range of the receiver.
5.2.8 Digital Pre-processing
The receiver carries out the following Digital Pre-processing procedures:
DC offset correction to negate the influence of DC variations in the signal
Power calculation to select one of the two signal paths for further processing;
this depends on the power of the received signal
Frequency translation which supports the demodulation process.
The data is then output via the RFI to the telecommunications basebandfunctions for demodulation.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 75 / 234
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.3 Control FunctionsThe principal control functions are described in the following table.
Function Description
RF HardwareStatus
The status of the RF hardware is dynamicallyconfigured to meet the current requirements of theBSS.
The control functions therefore manage the RFhardware according to the changing requirementsduring:
Power-up and initialization
Normal operation
Reconfiguration
Failure conditions.
Frequency HoppingControl
Control of the frequency hopping function is performedfor hardware configurations that implement frequencyhopping as part of the RF functions.
Clock Management Clock selection and supervision is performed forhardware configurations that provide redundant clockbuses.
FrequencySynthesizerProgramming
The frequency synthesizers in the BTS areprogrammed under control of the BSC. This functionis implemented by extracting control signals from thedatastream provided by the BSC.
Alarm Processing Alarms originating in the RF functions are supervised,collected and passed to the O&M functions.
High/Low GainSelection
Selection of the high or low gain path on the uplink isdetermined by measuring the received signal power onthe high and low gain paths. If the signal strength forthe low gain path is high enough, then it is selected.Otherwise the high gain path is used.
Table 8: RF Control Functions
76 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
5.4 Coupling FunctionsThe BTS coupling functions interface the RF signal paths to the BTS antennae.These functions are described in the following table.
Function Description Uplink Downlink
Isolating The isolating function prevents the generation of additional intermodulationproducts by improving the isolation between the transmitters.
N Y
Combining The combining function sums the RF signals from a pair of BTStransmitters, to enable them to share a single antenna. Several pairsof transmitters can be used in a BTS configurations, each with theirassociated antenna.
N Y
Duplexing Duplexing enables the uplink and downlink to share a single antenna.
Duplexing performs the following functions that are common to thedownlink and uplink signal paths:
Suppresses unwanted emissions outside the downlink band,especially emissions which would fall into the uplink band
Ensures that isolation between the transmitter and receiver in the
duplexing function prevents the downlink signals from blocking thereceiver
Ensures that wide-band noise and spurious emissions present in thedownlink carrier do not cause interference in the receive band.
On the uplink, duplexing also performs the following additional functions:
Rejects the receiver’s image frequency
Ensures a high degree of isolation from the transmitters.
Duplexing does not deal with the third-order intermodulation componentsof the transmitter. Channel frequency allocation must thereforeensure that these intermodulation components do not fall in a usedreceiver channel.
Y Y
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 77 / 234
5 Telecommunication Functions - RF
Function Description Uplink Downlink
PowerCouplingandDetection
For the 9100 BTS only, the Power Coupling and Detection functionprotects the 9100 BTS against the effects of reflected RF power bymeasuring the reflected power level. For example, if the RF coupling tothe antenna is interrupted, the power measurement exceeds a specifiedthreshold. The function immediately removes the RF power by switchingoff the transmitters.
The power measurement is performed for power steps 0 to 9 only. This isbecause of the limited isolation between the transmission and receptionparts of the AN. The measurement is performed for all bursts in this powerrange and if more than 25% of measurements exceed the threshold,then an alarm is raised.
N Y
RFE The Receiver Front-End function provides low-noise pre-amplificationof the received signal, ahead of the main receiver function. The RFEfunction delivers the uplink signal to the BTS receivers via a PowerSplitting function.
Y N
Table 9: RF Coupling Functions
78 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
6 O&M and Support Functions
6 O&M and Support Functions
This chapter describes the:
O&M functions
Support functions.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 79 / 234
6 O&M and Support Functions
6.1 Introduction to O&M and Support FunctionsThe O&M functions monitor and control the operation of the BTS. Theseresponsibilities are shared with the BSC. The support functions controlnon-telecommunications features.
6.2 O&M FunctionsThe O&M functions are described in the following sections.
6.2.1 O&M Connections
The O&M functions exchange information and command messages withdifferent parts of the BTS, and with the BSC. This allows the O&M functions tomonitor and control the operation of the BTS. The different types of connectionused for this purpose are grouped into internal and external connections.
6.2.1.1 Internal ConnectionsInternally the O&M functions are connected from the OMU to theTRANS/CLOCK, the TRE or MTRE, and to the ANX modules. This is achievedby the BSII which provides high-speed transfer of downloadable software,operational parameters and alarms to processor controlled functions. All of theprocessors can be loaded or configured via the BSII.
Additionally, the non-intelligent BTS functions, e.g., power supplies, fans, etc.,are connected to the O&M functions via the BCB.
All BTS functional modules are identified by location within the BTS cabinet(9100 BTS) or in terms of an inbox and a box address (9110 Micro BTS/9110-EMicro BTS). This ADR information is carried on either the BSII or the BCBdepending on the presence of a processor on the module.
6.2.1.2 External ConnectionsThe following interfaces provide the external connections shown in the followingtable.
Interface Description
Abis The O&M function is connected to the BSC via the LAPDOML logical interface. This is physically implemented onthe BSII. It is multiplexed onto the Abis Interface by theBTS transmission functions.
MMI A local MMI is provided for operator control of the BTS.This control is in the form of local maintenance andcontrol operations performed by the O&M functions. TheBTS sends a message to the BSC to inform it of theoperator’s actions.
XBCB (9100BTS only)
The 9100 BTS can control or supervise external eventsusing the XBCB Interface. This interface can also be usedby an external source to perform RI on the BTS, but onlyif the BTS is not powered up and only at factory level.
Table 10: O&M External Connections - Interfaces
80 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
6 O&M and Support Functions
The O&M functions are connected to the Abis Interfaces via the SUM to theConnection Area Interface (SUMCAI) (9100 BTS) or the MSUM ConnectionBox Interface (MSCOI) (9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS). This interface isused to transfer all external digital interfaces from the 9100 BTS SUM to the9100 BTS Connection Area (CA) or from the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E MicroBTS MSUM to the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS COBO.
6.2.2 O&M Processing
O&M processing uses three categories of functions, which are described below.
6.2.2.1 Configuration ManagementThe Configuration Management functions handle a number of tasks as shownin the following table.
Function Description
Central CommandControl
GSM function-level configuration commands from theBSC or operator are translated to low-level commandsfor the relevant BTS modules.
Configuration/Initialization
Software initially downloaded from the BSC to theO&M functions is subsequently downloaded to theother BTS modules. The O&M functions configureeach BTS module, and report start-up test results tothe BSC.
File Handling Up to two versions of the downloaded software canbe stored in memory at any one time. This allowsthe software to be downloaded without serviceinterruption.
Database A database is maintained for use by other O&Mfunctions and the BSC. It contains complete detailsof the BTS including configuration data, alarm andstatus information.
Remote Inventoryand RF CablingDetection
These O&M functions can interrogate the hardware todetermine which modules are installed and how theyare connected.
Live Insertion andRemoval of Modules(9100 BTS only)
All modules can be inserted or removed from the 9100BTS subracks while power is connected. An alarm issent to the O&M functions when a module is removed.
HardwareExtension/Reduction
Additional modules can be added to the existingconfiguration and then the BTS is reconfigured underBSC control. Similarly, modules can be removed andthe system reconfigured.
Table 11: O&M Configuration Management Function
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 81 / 234
6 O&M and Support Functions
6.2.2.2 Fault ManagementThe Fault Management functions perform a range of tasks as shown in thefollowing table.
Function Description
Alarm Detection andCorrelation
Detects and filters alarms to prevent the generation ofmultiple fault reports from a single source of failure.
Alarm Reporting Forwards alarms to the BSC for processing.
Alarm Translation Translates alarms to a GSM function-level format,independent of hardware and software versions.
Module PowerSupply Control
Module power on/off is controlled by the O&Mfunctions via the BCB Interface.
Table 12: O&M Fault Management Tasks
6.2.2.3 External Alarm HandlingExternal Alarm Connections provide a mechanical/electrical interface betweenthe Dedicated Alarm and Control Handling functions, and the BTS externalalarm sources. These external alarm sources include the cabinet door switch,smoke detector, etc.
6.2.3 Station Unit Sharing
The 9100 BTS can share certain functions between different sectors (i.e., cells)using Station Unit Sharing. The O&M, Transmission and Clock functions can beshared between sectors that have unique Telecommunications functions.
6.2.4 Recovery Strategy
In addition to monitoring and reporting the status of the BTS, the O&M functionscan implement recovery actions. The recovery strategy varies accordingto the type of BTS.
For configurations that include redundant hardware, recovery actions caninclude:
Hardware reconfiguration
Selective hardware shutdown
Hardware reset
Software reload and restart.
For BTSs designed as a simple unit, without redundancy, recovery actions arelimited to restart and reset attempts.
82 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
6 O&M and Support Functions
6.3 Support FunctionsThe Support functions are described in the following sections.
Support Function9100Indoor
9100Outdoor
9110MicroBTS/9110-EMicroBTS
HEAT N Y Y
Internal Power Supplies Y Y N
Internal Temperature Control Y Y N
External Battery Cabinet Y Y N
MPS/MPS2 Y Y N
Timing Functions Y Y Y
Table 13: Mapping of Support Functions to BTS Variants
6.3.1 HEAT
For the 9100 BTS outdoor and the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS, thedigital boards must not be operated below -5 �C.
6.3.1.1 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTSTo combat low temperature conditions, heating elements (resistors) are fitted tothe MPS/MPS2 module. In addition to this, two HEAT modules are also fitted;one to each digital module. The +26 V supply that is normally used to feed thepower amplifiers is used to warm up the BTS when its internal temperature is inthe range -33 �C through 0 �C. Once the unit reaches 0 �C the power amplifierbecomes operational. As the temperature increases from 0 �C to 15 �C, theamount of heating power is reduced linearly from 80 W to 0 W.
6.3.1.2 9100 BTS OutdoorHeating is provided by electrical air heaters if the internal air temperature isbelow 10 �C. They are fitted to the floor or on the side wall of each compartment(except MBO1) in the 9100 BTS outdoor. In the MBO1/MBO1DC cabinet, theHEAT2/HEATDC module is installed underneath the HEX4 module at the backof the front door. The HEAT2 version is AC-mains powered, the HEATDC isDC-voltage powered.
6.3.2 Internal Power Supplies
9100 BTS configurations intended for outdoor use are equipped with internalpower supplies. These convert the mains supply voltage to the nominal 48 VDCrequired by individual 9100 BTS modules.
The 9100 BTS MBO can be powered by AC mains or DC supply voltage.
Configurations used indoors are supplied in two variants for either AC or DCsupply voltages. The AC supply variant is equipped with internal power supplies
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 83 / 234
6 O&M and Support Functions
that are similar to the 9100 BTS outdoor configurations. The DC supply variantcontains DC filters to condition the DC input voltage supply.
For both variants, each module contains a DC/DC converter to produce therequired voltage levels needed by the individual module. Module power on/offis controlled by the O&M functions via the BCB Interface.
The following additional features are provided.
84 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
6 O&M and Support Functions
6.3.2.1 Output MonitoringAll power supply outputs are monitored for output voltage. If an undervoltagecondition is detected, an alarm is raised and sent to the O&M functions.
6.3.2.2 External LoadExternal loads like pylon lightning, transmission equipment etc., can besupplied by the internal 48 VDC power supplies of the indoor and outdoor BTSAC variants. In case of an indoor BTS DC configuration, external loads can beconnected via the BTS to the external BTS DC power supply.
6.3.2.3 Battery BackupThe AC supply variants use optional backup battery to maintain operation in theevent of mains supply failures. Backup batteries are permanently connectedin-circuit. They are disconnected only in case of deep discharge.
After an AC supply failure, TREs can be selectively shut down to extend thetime the BTS operates on battery power. At least one TRE per cell remainsin operation. The TRE that supports the BCCH, SDDCH, and some TCHswill always be kept operational. Only the TREs exclusively carrying TCHsare shut down.
When the AC supply fails, a timer starts. After a pre-set period the TCH-onlyTREs are shut down. When the AC power supply is restored, another 10second timer starts. If the power supply is stable and within its operatingtolerances at the end of this period, the TREs are restored to operation.
The pre-set value of the first timer, default 120 seconds, can be read usingthe RI.
6.3.3 Internal Temperature Control
All 9100 BTSs are equipped with an internal temperature control function. Forthe 9100 BTS, this consists of heating elements (outdoor cabinets only) andcooling fans, controlled by temperature sensors and supervisory equipment.
Depending on the hardware configuration, the Temperature Control functioncan delay power up of the main equipment at switch on. Power is applied whenthe internal temperature has been raised or lowered to within specified limits.
The Temperature Control function monitors the internal temperature during9100 BTS operation. It switches the fans or heaters on and off, to maintain thespecified temperature range.
Note that the heaters and heat exchangers or direct air cooling systems(HEAT2 and HEX2, HEX3, HEX4, HEX5, HEX8 or HEX9 or DAC 8/DAC9respectively) used in outdoor configurations are controlled independentlyof the BTS OMU functions.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 85 / 234
6 O&M and Support Functions
6.3.4 External Battery Cabinets
External battery cabinets are available for indoor and outdoor installation.Cabinets are used to house a large backup battery to maintain operationin the event of mains supply failures. In this case it is not allowed to use aBTS configuration with a parallel internal backup battery. Backup batteriesare permanently connected in-circuit; they are disconnected only in caseof deep discharge.
6.3.4.1 Indoor Battery CabinetAs required, up to three battery units (48 VDC) can be installed inside theindoor battery cabinet. These battery units can be connected separately tosupply different BTSs or they can be connected in parallel to supply one BTS.
If battery units are used for different BTSs, each branch can be switched offseparately. If battery units are used for one BTS, all branches can be switchedoff commonly.
Each battery unit has a temperature sensor which monitors the batterytemperature. The output of each sensor is connected to separate RIBAT boardswhich are installed inside the battery cabinet. RIBAT boards are powered by theBTS(s). They prepare the sensor information used by the SUMA/SUMX (insidethe BTS) to regulate the charging voltage and thus preventing overheating.
6.3.4.2 Outdoor Battery CabinetAs required, up to three battery units (48 VDC) can be installed inside theoutdoor battery cabinet. These battery units are connected in parallel tosupply one BTS.
Each branch can be switched off separately. Additionally all branches can beswitched off commonly (main circuit breaker).
Each battery unit has a temperature sensor which monitors the batterytemperature. The output of each sensor is connected to separate RIBAT boardswhich are installed inside the battery cabinet. RIBAT boards are powered bythe BTS(s). They prepare the sensor information used by the SUMA/SUMX(inside BTS) to regulate the charging voltage and thus preventing overheating.
The battery branches are fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes dischargethe gasses produced during battery charging to the external environment.
The external outdoor battery cabinet has an air conditioner with an integratedheater. The air conditioner maintains the correct air environment inside thecabinet. The airflow inside the cabinet is isolated from the outside environment.
The heater switches on automatically if the internal air temperature falls belowa pre-defined temperature (+10 �C). An alarm is raised if the air conditioner orheater fails. Both air conditioner and heater are powered by 230 VAC power.
An optical smoke detector is installed in order to raise an alarm in case ofsmoke inside the cabinet. The smoke detector is powered by the BTS.
The cabinet door presses an electronic switch which raises an alarm, if the dooris open. For maintenance and service, the open door alarm can be switched off.
For maintenance and service, a service light and integral 230 VAC powersocket is available.
86 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
6 O&M and Support Functions
6.3.5 MPS / MPS2
The MPS for the BTS 9110 is an AC/DC converter and provides the followingvoltages:
+26 V
+9 V
+5.1 V
+3.3 V
-9 V.
If the input voltage level falls below the stated minimum (170 V), the MPSautomatically switches off. When the voltage is restored at, or above, theminimum level, the MPS switches back on again automatically.
The MPS2 is the AC/DC converter for the BTS 9110-E and provides thefollowing voltages:
+26.1 V
+9.3 V
+5.4 V
-5.1 V
+3.45 V
If the input voltage level falls below the minimum (150 V), the MPS2automatically switches off. When the voltage is restored at 160 V, the MPS2switches back on again automatically (hysteresis).
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 87 / 234
6 O&M and Support Functions
6.3.6 Timing Functions
The Timing functions are described in the following sections.
6.3.6.1 Master Frequency GenerationAll BTS clocks are derived from a 13 MHz master reference frequency. Themaster frequency is generated by the master frequency generator. This is ahigh stability oscillator.
The BTS can operate in master mode or slave mode. In the master mode,the BTS uses the internal 13 MHz master frequency. This clock can be eitherfree-running, or synchronized to the PCM clock on the Abis Interface. If thefree-running mode is used, the BTS internal clock requires yearly calibration.
In the slave mode, the BTS is synchronized as a slave to another BTS’s masterclock. The synchronization is performed using the XCLK Interface.
Additionally, an external clock synchronization signal for the BTS can beprovided by the XGPS option. This signal can be used to replace thePCM synchronization from the Abis Interface. The GPS option is a futureenhancement that is not currently available.
Because all 9100 BTS configurations can be run in master or slave mode, theXCLK Interface can be used for either output or input of the 13 MHz masterfrequency.
6.3.6.2 Timing Signal GenerationFrom the 13 MHz reference signal, the following slower synchronization clocksare derived by a process of frequency division:
2.167 MHz OBCLK
216.7 Hz FCLK with Frame Number multiplexed.
6.3.6.3 Clock DistributionThe Clock Distribution function distributes the synchronization clocks to theMTRE/TRE and AN (9100 BTS only). The two synchronization clocks arereferred to as the CLKI.
88 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
7 Functional Units
7 Functional Units
This chapter describes the functional units architecture of the 9100 BTSand 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS. It shows how to map the functionsto functional units.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 89 / 234
7 Functional Units
7.1 Introduction to Functional UnitsThis chapter introduces the functional units and the configurations that arepossible with these units. The functional units are the elements that physicallyrealize the BTS functions. The BTS functions are described in TransmissionFunctions (Section 3), Telecommunication Functions - Baseband (Section4), Telecommunication Functions - RF (Section 5) and O&M and SupportFunctions (Section 6).
7.2 Functional Units ArchitectureThis section provides a description of the BTS functional architecture in termsof Functional Units, Functional Block Diagram, and Interfaces for the 9100 BTSand 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS.
7.2.1 9100 BTS Functional Units Architecture
The 9100 BTS contains the following functional units:
AN
CA
SUM
TRE.
The CA is not described as a separate section. It is included in the SUMdescription, see Introduction to the Station Unit Module (Section 10.1).
7.2.1.1 9100 BTS Functional Block DiagramThe following figure shows the relationship between the 9100 BTS functionalunits and their interfaces.
XRF
CA
TRE(s)
AN(s)
SUM
RFI
Abis
XIO
XBCB
XCLK
CLKI
BSII
BCB
ADR
MMI
BCB
SUMCAI
BTS A9100
AirInterface
AN : Antenna Network
CA : Cell Allocation
SUM : Station Unit Module
TRE : Transmitter and Receiver Equipment
Figure 19: 9100 BTS Functional Units Breakdown
90 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
7 Functional Units
7.2.1.2 9100 BTS External InterfacesThe main external interfaces for the 9100 BTS functional units are described inthe following table.
Interface Description
Abis Provides a 2 Mbit/s link between the 9100 BTS and the BSC.The SUM provides two Abis Interfaces to allow connection tothe BSC in ring or chain configuration.
Air Provides the radio interface with the Mobile Station. It carriesboth signalling and traffic information.
MMI Allows the connection of the BTS Terminal used for O&Mconfiguration and telecommunications configuration.
XBCB Supervises or controls external events or, can be used toperform external RI on the 9100 BTS at factory level.
XCLK Synchronizes the BTS 9100 to an external clock master.Alternatively, it is used to provide a clock from the 9100 BTSfor external slave BTSs.
XIO Provides 24 inputs and eight outputs to allow the connectionof external alarms.
XRF Provides the link between the AN and the antennae.
Table 14: Principal 9100 BTS External Interfaces
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 91 / 234
7 Functional Units
7.2.1.3 9100 BTS Internal InterfacesThe main internal interfaces for the 9100 BTS functional units are described inthe following table.
Interface Description
ADR Determines the physical location of a module in the 9100 BTS.This location information is grouped in terms of subrack addressthen slot address.
BCB Provides a serial interface used for RI and to allow the SUM tocontrol the module power supplies.
BSII Handles OML and TCH data and the appropriate RSL datafor each TRE. Internal O&M messages are also exchangedon this bus.
CLKI CLKI consists of two lines, the reference clock and the framesignal which also carries the Frame Number.
RFI Consists of three lines between the TRE and the AN; one TREoutput and two TRE inputs. Each TRE has its own RFI.
SUMCAI Transfers all external digital interfaces from the SUM to theBTS 9100 CA. This interface carries the XCLK, XBCB, XIO,and Abis Interfaces.
Table 15: Principal 9100 BTS Internal Interfaces
7.2.2 BTS 9110/9110-E Functional Units Architecture
The BTS 9110/9110-E functional units are described in the following sections.A functional block diagram is provided, as well as a list of the internal andexternal interfaces used.
7.2.2.1 Functional Units for the 9110The BTS 9110 contains the following functional units:
COBO
MAN1, MAN2
MPS
MSUM
MTRE.
92 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
7 Functional Units
7.2.2.2 Functional Units for the 9110-EThe BTS 9110-E contains the following functional units:
COBO (this is not the same COBO as used for the 9110)
MANM, MAND
MPS2
MSUMA
MTREDA.
7.2.2.3 Functional Block DiagramThe following figure shows the relationship between the BTS 9110/9110-Efunctional units and their interfaces.
XRF
MSUM/MSUMA
RFI
Abis
XIN
CLKI
BSII
BCB
ADR
MMI
BTS A9110 / A9110−E
AirInterface
COBO
PCIXPS
XGPS
XBAT
XST_RA
MSCOI /ABISCOI
IPS
MPS / MPS2
IAL
MTRE / MTREDA
MAN
RFI
MTRE / MTREDA
XPS
COBO : Connection Box
MAN : Micro-BTS Antenna Network
MPS/MPS2 : Micro-BTS Power Supply
MSUM/MSUMA: Micro-BTS Station Unit Module
MTRE/MTREDA: Micro-BTS Transmitter and Receiver Equipment
Figure 20: 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Functional Units Breakdown
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 93 / 234
7 Functional Units
7.2.2.4 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS External InterfacesThe external interfaces used in the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTSfunctional units are described below.
Interface Description
Abis Provides a 2 Mbit/s link between the 9110 MicroBTS/9110-E Micro BTS and the BSC. The COBO providestwo Abis Interfaces to allow connection to the BSC in amultidrop configuration.
Air Provides the radio interface with the Mobile Station. Itcarries both signalling and traffic information.
IEB Connects up to two 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS,in slave mode, to a 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS inmaster mode. The interface comprises three subsections.When the BTS is used in master mode, two of thesesubsections can used to connect the BTS to other BTSsin slave mode. The third subsection is used if the BTS isused in slave mode.
MMI Allows the connection of the BTS Terminal used for O&Mconfiguration and telecommunications configuration.
OMU_TRACE Provides an asynchronous serial interface that can be usedfor fault tracing and debugging.
TRANS_TRACE Provides an asynchronous serial interface that can be usedfor trace and debugging.
XBAT Provides an asynchronous interface that is used to controlan external battery backup unit.
XGPS Controls and supervises a GPS receiver which is used tosynchronize the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS. Theinterface also provides a 1 Hz or 10 MHz clock sourcethat can be used in conjunction with the GPS receiver orindependently.
XIN Provides eight alarm inputs.
XRF Provides the link between the MAN/MAN2 and theantennae.
XST_RA Provides two serial interfaces that are used as a control linkbetween the MSUM/MSUMA and Stealth Radio.
XPS External Power Supply Interface.
Table 16: Principal 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS External Interfaces
94 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
7 Functional Units
7.2.2.5 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Internal InterfacesThe internal interfaces used in the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTSfunctional units are described below.
Interface Description
ADR Determines the physical location of a module in the 9110Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS. This location information isgrouped in terms of an inbox and then a box address.
BCB Provides a serial interface used for RI.
BSII Handles OML and TCH data and the appropriate RSLdata for each MTRE. Internal O&M messages are alsoexchanged on this bus. When used in a master/slaveconfiguration this interface provides an interconnectionbetween the 9110 Micro BTS or 9110-E Micro BTS entities.
CLKI Comprises the reference clock and the frame signal. Theframe signal also carries the Frame Number.
Internal Alarm(IAL)
Provides the LNA failure alarm.
InternalPower SupplyInterface (IPS)
Provides the internal supply DC power and is distributedfrom the MPS / MPS2.
MSCOI /ABISCOI
Transfers all external digital interfaces from the MSUM/ MSUMA to the COBO. This interface carries the XIN,XGPS, XBAT, XST_RA and Abis Interfaces.
PowerConnectionInterface (PCI)
Provides the AC power input to the MPS / MPS2 and isdistributed from the COBO.
RFI Consists of one TRE output and two TRE input linesbetween the MTRE and the MAN, or two lines for the 9110Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS fitted with a MAN1/MANMand no antenna diversity. Each MTRE has its own RFI.
Table 17: Principal 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Internal Interfaces
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 95 / 234
7 Functional Units
7.3 Mapping of Functions to Functional UnitsThe following figure shows the relationship between the functions and thefunctional units.
There are two possible mappings, direct and indirect:
Direct mapping - some of the functions can be mapped directly to functionalunits.
Indirect mapping - functions must first be mapped to functional entities. Thisis because, in some cases, a single function can be split between more
than one functional entity. These functional entities can then be mapped to
the functional units.
Functions
Logical Functions
PhysicalFunctions
FunctionalEntities
Functional Units
Example of a DirectMapping of a Function
Function is:Master ClockGeneration
Functional Unit is:SUM/MSUM
Example of an IndirectMapping of a Function
Function is:Rate Adaptation
Functional Unit is:TRE/MTRE
Functional Entities are:Encoder, Decoder
Figure 21: Mapping of Functions to Functional Units
The following tables map the functions onto the BTS functional units:
Table 18 - Transmission
Table 19 - Telecommunication Baseband
Table 20 - Telecommunication RF
Table 21 - O&M
Table 22 - Support.
96 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
7 Functional Units
7.3.1 Functional Mapping
The functional mapping between the Transmission functions and the BTSfunctional units is shown below.
Function Functional Unit
Multiplexing SUM/MSUM
Transmission of Signalling SUM/MSUM
Transmission O&M SUM/MSUM
Transmission of Traffic SUM/MSUM
Clock Synchronization SUM/MSUM
Table 18: Functional Mapping - Transmission
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 97 / 234
7 Functional Units
7.3.2 Telecommunication Baseband Functional Mapping
The functional mapping between the Telecommunication Baseband functionsand the BTS functional units is shown below.
Function Functional Unit
Rate Adaptation TRE/MTRE
Channel Encoding and Decoding TRE/MTRE
Interleaving/De-interleaving TRE/MTRE
Encryption/Decryption TRE/MTRE
Demodulation TRE/MTRE
Antenna Diversity TRE/MTRE
Radio Link Recovery TRE/MTRE
Radio Resource Indication TRE/MTRE
Paging TRE/MTRE
DTX TRE/MTRE
DRX TRE/MTRE
Quality Measurement TRE/MTRE
Power Control TRE/MTRE
Clock Distribution TRE/MTRE
Protocol Management TRE/MTRE
Radio Channel Management TRE/MTRE
Transcoder Time Alignment TRE/MTRE
Table 19: Functional Mapping - Telecommunication Baseband
98 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
7 Functional Units
7.3.3 Telecommunication RF Functional Mapping
The table below maps the Telecommunication RF functions onto the BTSfunctional units.
Function Functional Unit
RF Carrier Generation TRE/MTRE
Frequency Hopping - Implemented by TRE/MTRE
Frequency Hopping - Performed by TRE/MTRE
Frequency Hopping - Controlled by TRE/MTRE,SUM/MSUM
GMSK Modulation TRE/MTRE
Up-Conversion TRE/MTRE
Power Amplification and Power Control TRE/MTRE
Power Coupling and Detection TRE/MTRE
Channel Selection and Conversion TRE/MTRE
Signal Amplification TRE/MTRE
A-D Conversion TRE/MTRE
Digital Pre-processing TRE/MTRE
Control the Status of the RF Hardware TRE/MTRE
Clock Selection and Supervision SUM/MSUM
Program the Frequency Synthesizers TRE/MTRE
Handle Control and Alarm Processing TRE/MTRE
Select the High or Low Gain Path on the Uplink TRE/MTRE
Downlink Isolating AN/MAN
Downlink Combining AN/MAN
Downlink Duplexing AN/MAN
Downlink Power Coupling and Detection AN
Uplink Antenna Pre-amplification AN/MAN
Uplink Signal Splitting (Duplexing) AN/MAN
Table 20: Functional Mapping - Telecommunication RF
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 99 / 234
7 Functional Units
7.3.4 O&M Functional Mapping
The table below maps the O&M functions onto the BTS functional units.
Function Functional Unit
Configuration Management SUM/MSUM
Fault Management SUM/MSUM
Dedicated Alarm Handling SUM/MSUM
External Alarm Handling SUM/MSUM
Central Command Control SUM/MSUM
Configuration/Initialization SUM/MSUM,TRE/MTRE, AN
Software Replacement SUM/MSUM,TRE/MTRE, AN
Configuration Parameter File Management SUM/MSUM
Testing SUM/MSUM
Alarm Detection, Filtering and Correlation SUM/MSUM
Alarm Forwarding SUM/MSUM
Alarm Translation SUM/MSUM
Command Translation SUM/MSUM
Table 21: Functional Mapping - O&M
7.3.5 Support Functional Mapping
The table below maps the support functions onto the BTS functional units.
Function Functional Unit
Clock Generation and Distribution SUM/MSUM
External Alarm Collection SUM/MSUM
Internal Self-tests SUM/MSUM
Table 22: Functional Mapping - Support
100 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8 Configurations
This chapter lists all possible configurations for the following BTS types:
9100 BTS indoor
9100 BTS outdoor
9110 Micro BTS / 9110-E Micro BTS.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 101 / 234
8 Configurations
8.1 Naming Conventions Used for the ConfigurationsIn the following sections all possible configurations are listed in tables, sortedby the different types of BTSs.
The naming conventions used for the BTS configurations are listed in thefollowing table.
1x1...4 Means 1 sector with up to 4 TREs
3x1...2 Means 3 sectors with up to 2 TREs per sector
1x1...2/1x1...2 Means Multiband configuration, with 1 sector and up to 2TREs in Band 1, and 1 sector and up to 2 TREs in Band 2
1x(...2/...2) Means Multiband configuration, with 1 sector and up to2 TREs in each band
Table 23: Naming Conventions Used for the BTS Configurations
8.2 9100 BTS ConfigurationsAll 9100 BTS configurations use one SUM module. The different configurationsare due to the required number of carriers, and therefore TRE modules. TheseTRE modules are connected to the antennae using one or more ANC, ANXand ANY modules.
Many configurations are possible using the ANC, ANX and ANY modules, butthey all follow the same principles.
For the 9100 BTS six different sizes of cabinets are available:
CBO
MBI3
MBO1
MINI/CPT2
MBO2
MEDI/MBI5.
In addition, there is a distinction made between configurations for IndoorBTSs and Outdoor BTSs.
102 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.1 Configurations Using TWIN TRM
8.2.1.1 General Information About TWIN TRMThe TWIN TRM is a transceiver module with new capabilities and multipleoperation modes. The new capabilities are detailed in the following table.
Capability Description
No (One TRE only)
Half Cabled (one TRE only)
2 TRE Support
Both Parts Cabled (The module has the capability to actas 2 TREs)
No (Not supported)Tx Div Capability
Yes
The module, due to the way it is cabled on the antennacan provide transmission diversity (Same signal sent on2 diffrent antennas).
For Tx Div and Rx div, it is not enough that alloutputs/inputs be cabled on same sector. They mustadditionally be connected on different antennaes
This capability is restricted by cabling and is supportedonly in case the TwoTRESupport is Both Parts Cabled onthe same sector and cabled on different AN.
No (Not supported)4 Rx Div Support
Yes
The module, due to the way it is cabled on the antenna anddue to internal design can process receive signal comingfrom 4 antennas. 4RxDiv is automatically activated ifTxDiv is activated and the module is 4RxDiv capable.
This capability is restricted by cabling and is supportedonly in case the TwoTRESupport is Both Parts Cabled onthe same sector and cabled on different AN.
Table 24: TWIN TRM Capabilities
The functional modes described in the following table are available for theTWIN TRM.
4RxDivSupport
2TRESupport
TxDivCapability
Possible TRE ModeConfiguration
No Half Cabled No 1TRE, No TxDiv
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 103 / 234
8 Configurations
4RxDivSupport
2TRESupport
TxDivCapability
Possible TRE ModeConfiguration
Yes Both PathsCabled
Yes 1TRE, TxDiv
1TRE, No TxDiv
2TRE, No TxDiv
No Both PathsCabled
Yes 2TRE, No TxDiv
1TRE, No TxDiv
1TRE, TxDiv
No Both PathsCabled
No 2TRE, No TxDiv
1TRE, No TxDiv
Table 25: TWIN TRM Modes
The following constraints must be taken into account:
Configurations with more than 12 TRXs should not contain any G3 TRE
(TRGM, TRDM, TRDH)
Indoor configurations with more than 16 TRXs require the MBI5 cabinet
variant 2BK 25965 ABxx or newer.
8.2.1.2 9100 BTS Indoor Configurations Using TWIN TRMThe following table lists the 9100 BTS indoor configurations using TWIN TRM.
104 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
MBI3
Carriers per sector
MBI5
Carriers per sector
TWINMode
Numberofsectors
AC withBU5
AC withother(external)BBU
DC AC withBU5
AC withBU90
AC withother(external)BBU
DC
1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
2 4/4 4/4 6/6 8/8 8/6 8/8 8/8
3 2/2/2 2/2/2 4/4/4 4/4/4 4/4/4 8/8/8 8/8/8
CapacityMode
4 - 2/2/2/2 2/2/2/2 4/4/4/4 4/4/4/4 4/4/4/4 6/6/6/6
1 8 10 12 16 16 16 16
2 3/3 4/4 6/6 10/10 8/8 10/10 12/12
CapacityModeLow Loss
3 - - - 6/6/6 4/4/4 6/6/6 8/8/8
1 4+4 4+4 6+6 8+* 8+8 8+8 12+12
2 - - - 4/4+4/4 4/4+4/4 4/4+4/4 6/6+6/6
Multiband& MB Cell
3 - - - 2/2/2+2/2/2 2/2/2+2/2/2 2/2/2+2/2/2 4/4/4+4/4/4
1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 2/2 2/2 2/2 4/4 4/4 4/4 4/4
CoverageModeTxDiv.2Rx Div.
3 1/1/1 2/2/2 2/2/2 2/2/2 2/2/2 2/2/2 4/4/4
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
CoverageModeTxDiv.2Rx Div.Low Loss 3 - - - 2/2/2 2/2/2 2/2/2 2/2/2
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
CoverageModeTxDiv.4Rx Div.Low Loss 3 - - - 2/2/2 2/2/2 2/2/2 2/2/2
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 105 / 234
8 Configurations
MBI3
Carriers per sector
MBI5
Carriers per sector
TWINMode
Numberofsectors
AC withBU5
AC withother(external)BBU
DC AC withBU5
AC withBU90
AC withother(external)BBU
DC
ExtendedCell
1 In, 1Out
4+4 4+4 4+4 8+8 8+8 8+8 8+8
ExtendedCellTxDiv,4RX Divfor outercell
1 In, 1Out
4+2 4+2 4+2 8+2 8+2 8+2 8+2
106 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.1.3 9100 BTS Outdoor Configurations Using TWIN TRMThe following table lists the 9100 BTS outdoor configurations using TWIN TRM.
TWIN Mode Number of sectors MBO1E
Carriers per sector
MBO2E
Carriers per sector
1 8 8
2 6/6 8/8
3 4/4/4 8/8/8
Capacity Mode
4 2/2/2/2 6/6/6/6
1 12 16
2 6/6 12/12
Capacity Mode Low Loss
3 - 8/8/8
1 6+6 12+12
2 2/2+2/2 6/6+6/6
Multiband & MB Cell
3 - 4/4/4+4/4/4
1 4 4
2 2/2 4/4
Coverage Mode TxDiv.2Rx Div.
3 2/2/2 4/4/4
1 2 2
2 2/2 2/2
Coverage Mode TxDiv.2Rx Div. Low Loss
3 - 2/2/2
1 2 2
2 2/2 2/2
Coverage Mode TxDiv.4Rx Div. Low Loss
3 - 2/2/2
Extended Cell 1 In, 1 Out 4+4 8+8
Extended Cell TxDiv,4RX Div for outer cell
1 In, 1 Out 4+2 8+2
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 107 / 234
8 Configurations
8.2.2 9100 BTS Indoor Configurations - DC Powered
The 9100 BTS used for indoor configurations can be powered by DC or AC.The DC-powered configurations are described in the following sections.
8.2.2.1 9100 BTS Standard Indoor DC-Powered ConfigurationsThe following table lists all possible standard indoor configurations which areDC powered.
Cabinet Size Configuration Type GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 Notes
MINI 1x1...4 - X X X -
MINI 2x1...2 - X X X -
MINI 1x1...3 + 1x1 - X X X -
MINI 3x1 - X X X -
MEDI 1x1...8 - X X X -
MBI3 1x1...8 - X X X (2)
MBI5 1x1...8 X X X X -
MEDI 1x9...12 - X X X (1)(2)
MBI5 1x9...12 - X X X (2)
MBI3 2x1...4 - X X X (2)
MEDI 2x1...6 - X X X (2)
MBI5 2x1...6 X X X X (2)
MEDI 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - X X - -
MBI5 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - X X - -
MBI3 3x1...2 - X X X -
MEDI 3x1...4 - X X X (2)
MBI5 3x1...4 X X X X (2)
(1) 1x12 is a 8+4 rack layout.
(2) No restrictions for GSM 1900 configurations based on TRPMs (Medium-power TREs). Formedium-power configurations using the TRAPs (Medium-power TREs, EDGE capable) some temperaturerestrictions are possible, as shown in Table 27.
Table 26: 9100 BTS Indoor Standard Configurations, DC Powered
108 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.2.2 9100 BTS Indoor DC-Powered Configurations with RestrictionsConfigurations which do not fulfill the +45 �C ambient temperature are listedin the table below.
Restrictions Configurations impacted Comments
+40 �C MEDI 1x1...8 DC, Standardmedium-power configuration GSM1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x6 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 1x7...8 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MBI3 2x1...4 DC, Standardmedium-power configuration GSM1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 2x3 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 2x4 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MEDI 1x9...12 Standardmedium-power configurationGSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x10 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 1x11...12 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MEDI 1x9...12 Medium-powerlow-losses configuration GSM 1900(using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x9 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 1x11...12 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MEDI 1x9...12 Standardmedium-power configurationGSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x10 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 1x11...12 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MBI5 1x9...12 AC or DC, Standardmedium-power configuration GSM1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x10 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 1x11...12 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MBI5 1x9...12 AC or DC,Medium-power low-lossesconfiguration GSM 1900 (usingTRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x10 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 1x11...12 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MBI5 2x1...6 AC or DC, Standardmedium-power configuration GSM1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 2x5 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 2x6 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MEDI 2x3...6 Medium-powerlow-losses configuration GSM 1900(using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 2x3...5 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 2x6 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MBI5 2x3...6 DC, Medium-powerlow-losses configuration GSM 1900(using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 2x3...5 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 2x6 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MEDI 3x1...4 Standardmedium-power configurationGSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 3x1...3 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 3x4 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
MBI5 3x1...4 AC or DC, Standardmedium-power configuration GSM1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 3x1...3 with 45 W
+45 �C up to 3x4 with 28 W (or 45 W at +40 �C)
Table 27: Indoor Configurations versus Temperature Restrictions
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 109 / 234
8 Configurations
8.2.2.3 9100 BTS Indoor DC-Powered Low Loss/High-Power ConfigurationsThe low loss and high-power configurations for 9100 BTS Indoor DC-poweredconfigurations are given in the following table.
Cabinet Size Configuration Type Low Losses (1)High Power GSM900/1800 Notes
MINI 2x1 - X -
MBI3 2x1 - X -
MEDI 1x1...4 - X -
MBI5 1x1...4 - X -
MBI3 1x3...4 X - -
MEDI 1x3...8 X - -
MBI5 1x3...8 X - -
MEDI 1x9...12 X - (2)
MBI5 1x9...12 X - (2)
MBI5 2x1...2 - X -
MEDI 2x1...4 - X -
MBI5 2x1...4 - X -
MEDI 2x3...6 X - (2)
MBI5 2x3...6 X - (2)
MEDI 3x1...2 - X -
MEDI 3x1...3 - X (3)
MBI5 3x1...3 - X -
(1) Configurations valid for GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900.
(2) No restrictions for GSM 1900 configurations based on TRPM (Medium-power TRE). For medium-powerconfigurations using the TRAP (Medium-power TRE, EDGE capable) some temperature restrictions arepossible, as shown in Table 27.
(3) Configuration with mixed high-power TREs and medium-power TREs. For each sector: the two firstTREs are high-power TREs (TADH, TAGH), and the third TRE is a medium-power TRE (TRAD/TRADE).
Table 28: 9100 BTS Indoor Low-losses and High-power Configurations, DC Powered
110 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.2.4 9100 BTS Indoor Multiband DC-Powered ConfigurationsThe table below lists the 9100 Indoor multiband DC configurations for allGSM bandwidths.
Cabinet Size Configuration TypeSingle BandCells
Multi-BandCells (1) Notes
MINI 1x1...2/1x1...2 X - -
MBI3 1x1...4/1x1...4 X - -
MINI 1x(...2/...2) - X -
MBI3 1x(...4/...4) - X -
MEDI 1x1...6/1x1...6 X - -
MBI5 1x1...6/1x1...6 X - -
MEDI 1x(...6/...6) - X -
MBI5 1x(...6/...6) - X -
MEDI 1x1...8/1x1...4 X - -
MBI5 1x1...8/1x1...4 X - -
MBI5 1x(...8/...4) - X -
MEDI 1x1...4/1x1...8 X - -
MBI5 1x1...4/1x1...8 X - -
MBI5 1x(...4/...8) - X -
MEDI 1x3...8LL/1X1...4 X - -
MBI5 1x3...8LL/1X1...4 X - -
MEDI 1x1...4/2x1...4 X - -
MBI5 1x1...4/2x1...4 X - -
MEDI 2x1...4/1x1...4 X - -
MBI5 2x1...4/1x1...4 X - -
MEDI 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 X - -
MBI5 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 X - -
MEDI ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 X - -
MBI5 ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 X - -
MEDI 2x1...4/2x1...2 X - -
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 111 / 234
8 Configurations
Cabinet Size Configuration TypeSingle BandCells
Multi-BandCells (1) Notes
MBI5 2x1...4/2x1...2 X - -
MEDI 2x(...4/...2) - X -
MBI5 2x(...4/...2) - X -
MEDI 2x1...2/2x1...4 X - -
MBI5 2x1...2/2x1...4 X - -
MEDI 2x(...2/...4) - X -
MBI5 2x(...2/...4) - X -
MEDI 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - X -
MBI5 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - X -
(1) : Multiband cell configurations are not available for GSM 900/1900
Table 29: 9100 BTS Indoor Multiband (GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900) Configurations, DC Powered
112 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.3 9100 BTS Indoor Configurations - AC Powered
9100 BTS used for indoor configurations can be powered by DC or AC. Allpossible indoor configurations which are AC powered are described in thefollowing sections.
8.2.3.1 9100 BTS Standard Indoor AC-Powered ConfigurationsThe 9100 BTS standard indoor AC-powered configurations are given in thefollowing table.
Cabinet SizeConfigurationType GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 Notes
MBI3 1x1...4 - X X X (2)
MEDI 1x2...8 - X X X -
MBI5 1x1...8 X X X X (4)
MBI5 1x9...12 - X X X (1)(2)(5)
MEDI 2x1...2 - X X X -
MBI3 2x1...2 - X X X (2)
MBI5 2x1...4 - X X X (3)
MEDI 2x1...6 - X X X (2)
MBI5 2x1...6 X X X X (2)(5)
MBI5 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - X X - (1)(2)
MBI3 3x1 - X X X (2)
MEDI 3x1...2 - X X X -
MBI5 3x1...2 - X X X (3)
MEDI 3x1...4 - X X X (2)
MBI5 3x1...4 X X X X (2)(5)
(1) Configurations with more than 8 TREs: no possibility of having internal batteries.
(2) Configurations without the possibility of having standard internal batteries, but a small battery (BATS)is possible.
(3) Configurations with the possibility of having standard internal batteries (large BBU).
(4) Configurations with the possibility of having standard internal batteries (large BBU), a small battery(BATS) is also possible.
(5) No restrictions for GSM 1900 configurations based on TRPM (Medium-power TRE). For medium-powerconfigurations using the TRAP (Medium-power TRE, EDGE capable) some temperature restrictions arepossible, as shown in Table 27.
Table 30: 9100 BTS Indoor Standard Configurations, AC Powered
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 113 / 234
8 Configurations
8.2.3.2 9100 BTS Indoor AC-Powered Low Loss/High-Power ConfigurationsThe low loss and high-power configurations for 9100 BTS Indoor AC-poweredconfigurations are given in the following table.
Cabinet Size Configuration Type Low Losses (1)High Power GSM1800 Notes
MBI3 1x3...4 X - (2)
MBI5 1x1...4 - X (2)
MBI5 1x3....8 X - (3)
MBI5 1x9...12 X - (2)(4)
MBI3 2x1 - X (2)
MBI5 2x1...4 - X (2)
MBI5 3x1...3 - X (2)
(1) Configurations valid for GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900..
(2) Configurations without the possibility of having standard internal batteries, but a small battery (BATS)is possible.
(3) Configurations with the possibility of having standard internal batteries (large BBU); but a small battery(BATS) is also possible.
(4) No restrictions for GSM 1900 configurations based on TRPM (Medium-power TRE). For medium-powerconfigurations using the TRAP (Medium-power TRE, EDGE capable) some temperature restrictions arepossible, as shown in Table 27.
Table 31: 9100 BTS Indoor Low Losses and High Power Configurations, AC Powered
114 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.3.3 9100 BTS Indoor Multiband AC-Powered ConfigurationsThe table below lists the 9100 Indoor multiband AC configurations for allGSM bandwidths.
Cabinet Size Configuration TypeSingle BandCells
Multi Band Cells(3) Notes
MBI5 1x1...6/1x1...6 X - (2)
MBI5 1x(...6/...6) - X (2)
MEDI 1x1...8/1x1...4 X - (1)
MBI5 1x1...8/1x1...4 X - (2)
MBI5 1x(...8/...4) - X (2)
MBI5 1x1...4/1x1...8 X - (2)
MBI5 1x(...4/...8) - X (2)
MBI5 1x3...8LL/1x1...4 X - (2)
MBI5 1x1...4/2x1...4 X - (2)
MBI5 2x1...4/1x1...4 X - (2)
(1) Configurations without the possibility of having internal batteries.
(2) Configurations without the possibility of having standard internal batteries, but a small battery (BATS)is possible.
(3) Multiband cell configurations are not available for GSM 900/1900
Table 32: 9100 BTS Indoor Multiband Configurations (GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900), AC Powered
8.2.3.4 9100 BTS Indoor Extended Cell ConfigurationsThe following table lists all possible indoor extended cell configurations.
Cabinet Size Configuration Type AC DC GSM 900 Notes
MEDI 1x1...4LL/1x1...4 - X X (1)
MBI5 1x1...4LL/1x1...4 X X X (1)(3)
MEDI 1x1...4/1x1...4 - X X (2)
MBI5 1x1...4/1x1...4 X X X (2)(3)
(1) Configuration based on REK.
(2) Configuration based on TMA.
(3) AC versions: without BBU, with BATS, or with large BBU
Table 33: 9100 BTS Indoor Standard Configurations, Extended Cell
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 115 / 234
8 Configurations
8.2.4 9100 BTS Outdoor Configurations
The following tables list all possible outdoor configurations.
8.2.4.1 Standard 9100 BTS Outdoor ConfigurationsThe table below shows the standard 9100 BTS outdoor configurations with fulfillthe +45 �C ambient temperature requirements. Configurations which do notfulfil this required are shown in the next section.
Cabinet Size Configuration Type GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 Notes
CBO 1x1...2 - X X - -
MINI 1x1...8 - X X X -
MBO1 1x1...8 X X X X(7) -
CBO 2x1 - X X - -
CBO 2x2 - X X - (9)
MINI 2x1...4 - X X X -
MBO1/MBO1E 2x1...4 - X X X(8) -
CBO 3x1 - X X - (9)
MINI 3x1...2 - X X X -
MBO1/MBO1E 3x1...2 - X X X -
MEDI 1x1...8 - X X - (1)
MEDI 1x9...12 - X X X(3) (2)
MBO2/MBO2E 1x9...12 - X X X (2)
CPT2 2x1...6 - X X(5) - -
MEDI 2x1...6 - X(4) X X(3) -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x1...6 X X X X -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - X X X -
CPT2 3x1...4 - X X(5) X(3) -
MEDI 3x1...4 - X(4) X(6) X(3) -
MBO2/MBO2E 3x1...4 X X X X -
MBO2/MBO2E 4x1...3 - X X X -
116 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
Cabinet Size Configuration Type GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 Notes
MBO2/MBO2E 2x4 + 2x2 - X X X -
(1) Configurations replaced by MINI configurations.(2) 1x12 configuration is a 8+4 rack layout.(3) No restrictions for GSM 1900 configurations based on TRPM (Medium-power TRE). For medium-powerconfigurations using the TRAP (Medium-power TRE, EDGE capable) some temperature restrictions arepossible as shown in Table 35.(4) Configuration could be replaced by an equivalent CPT2 configuration.(5) Configuration with some restrictions as shown in Table 35.(6) Configuration could be replaced by an equivalent CPT2 configuration with some restrictions as shownin Table 35.(7) The configuration is limited to 6 TREs.(8) The configuration is limited to 6 TREs over the two sectors.(9) The configuration is available only on CBO DC variant.
Table 34: Standard 9100 BTS Outdoor Configurations
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 117 / 234
8 Configurations
8.2.4.2 9100 BTS Outdoor Configurations with RestrictionsOutdoor configurations which do not fulfill the +45 �C ambient temperatureare listed in the table below.
Restrictions Configurations impacted Comments
+38 �C MEDI 2x1...4 High-power configuration GSM1800 (using TADH TREs)
-
CPT2 3x1...2 High-power configuration GSM1800 (using TADH TREs)
-
CPT2 2x1...6 Standard medium-powerconfiguration GSM 1800 (using TRAD/TRADETREs)
+45 �C up to 2x1...4 with 45 W
+40 �C
CPT2 3x1...4 Standard medium-powerconfiguration GSM 1800 (using TRAD/TRADETREs)
+45 �C up to 3x1...3 with 45 W
MEDI 1x9...12 Standard medium-powerconfiguration GSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x10 with 45 W+40 �C andpower reducedto 28 W
MEDI 1x9...12 Medium-power low-lossesconfiguration GSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 1x9 with 45 W
MEDI 2x1...6 Standard medium-powerconfiguration GSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 2x1...5 with 45 W
MEDI 2x3...6 Medium-power low-lossesconfiguration GSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 2x3...5 with 45 W
CPT2 3x1...4 Standard medium-powerconfiguration GSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 3x1...3 with 45 W
MEDI 3x1...4 Standard medium-powerconfiguration GSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C up to 3x1...3 with 45 W
MEDI 3x3...4 Medium-power low-lossesconfiguration GSM 1900 (using TRAP TREs)
+45 �C 3x3 with 45 W
Table 35: Outdoor Configurations versus Temperature Restrictions
118 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.4.3 9100 BTS Outdoor Low Losses/ High-Power ConfigurationsThe low loss and high-power configurations of the outdoor 9100 BTS aredescribed below.
CabinetSize Configuration Type
Low LossesGSM 900/1800/1900
High PowerGSM 900/1800 Notes
CBO 1x1...2 - X -
MINI 1x1...4 - X -
MBO1/MBO1E 1x1...4 - X -
CBO 2x1 - X -
MINI 2x1...2 - X -
MBO1/MBO1E 2x1...2 - X -
MEDI 1x3...8 X - -
MBO1/MBO1E 1x5...8 X - (7)
MEDI 1x9...12 X - (1)
MEDI 2x1...2 - X (2)
MEDI 2x1...4 X (4) X (3) -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x1...4 - X -
MEDI 2x3...6 X - (1)
MBO2/MBO2E 2x3...6 X - -
CBO 3x1 - X (8)
CPT2 3x1...2 - X (3)
MEDI 3x1...2 - X (5)
MBO2/MBO2E 3x1...2 - X -
MEDI 3x1...3 - X (6)
MBO2/MBO2E 3x1...4 - X (6)
MEDI 3x1...4 X - (1)
MEDI 3x3...4 X - (3)
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 119 / 234
8 Configurations
CabinetSize Configuration Type
Low LossesGSM 900/1800/1900
High PowerGSM 900/1800 Notes
MBO2/MBO2E 3x3...4 X - -
(1) No restrictions for GSM 1900 configurations based on TRPM (Medium-power TRE). For medium-powerconfigurations using the TRAP (Medium-power TRE, EDGE capable) some temperature restrictions arepossible as shown in Table 35.(2) Configuration replaced by MINI configuration.(3) Restriction as shown in Table 35.(4) The 2x1...4 configuration is now a 2x3...6 low losses, under-equipped configuration.(5) Configuration could be replaced by equivalent CPT2 with temperature restriction as shown in Table 35.(6) Configuration with mixed high-power TREs and medium-power TREs.(7) For GSM 1900, configuration is limited to 6 TREs.(8) Configuration available only CBO DC variant
Table 36: 9100 BTS Outdoor Low-losses and High-power Configurations
120 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.4.4 9100 BTS Outdoor Multiband GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 ConfigurationsThe table below shows the outdoor multiband configurations for both the GSM900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 configurations.
Cabinet Size Configuration TypeSingle BandCells
Multi-BandCells (1) Notes
MINI 1x1...4/1x1...4 X - -
MBO1/MBO1E 1x1...4/1x1...4 X - -
MINI 1x(...4/...4) - X -
MBO1/MBO1E 1x(...4/...4) - X -
MEDI 1x1...6/1x1...6 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x1...6/1x1...6 X - -
MEDI 1x(...6/...6) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x(...6/...6) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x1...8/1x1...4 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x1...4/1x1...8 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x(...8/...4) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x(...4/...8) - X -
MEDI 1x1...4/2x1...4 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x1...4/2x1...4 X - -
MEDI 2x1...4/1x1...4 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x1...4/1x1...4 X - -
CPT2 2x1...2/2x1...2 X - -
MEDI 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 X - -
MEDI ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 X - -
MEDI 2x1...4/2x1...2 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x1...4/2x1...2 X - -
MEDI 2x1...2/2x1...4 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x1...2/2x1...4 X - -
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 121 / 234
8 Configurations
Cabinet Size Configuration TypeSingle BandCells
Multi-BandCells (1) Notes
MEDI 2x1...3/2x1...3 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x1...3/2x1...3 X - -
CPT2 2x(...2/...2) - X -
MEDI 2x(...4/...2) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x(...4/...2) - X -
MEDI 2x(...2/...4) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x(...2/...4) - X -
MEDI 2x(...3/...3) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 2x(...3/...3) - X -
MEDI 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - X -
MEDI 3x1...2/3x1...2 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 3x1...2/3x1...2 X - -
MEDI 3x(...2/...2) - X -
MBO2/MBO2E 3x(...2/...2) - X -
(1) : Multiband cell configurations are not available for GSM 900/1900
Table 37: 9100 BTS Outdoor Multiband (GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900) Configurations
122 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.2.4.5 9100 BTS Outdoor Multiband (GSM 850/1800) ConfigurationsThe GSM 850/1800 outdoor configurations for the 9100 are listed below.
Cabinet Size Configuration TypeSingle BandCells
Multi BandCells Notes
MBO2/MBO2E 3x1/3x1...3 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 3x(1/...3) - X -
Table 38: 9100 BTS Outdoor Multiband (GSM 850/1800) Configurations
8.2.4.6 9100 BTS Outdoor Multiband GSM 850/1900 ConfigurationsThe multiband configurations for GSM 850/1900 9100 BTS outdoorconfigurations is shown in the following table.
Cabinet Size Configuration TypeSingle BandCells
Multi BandCells Notes
MBO2/MBO2E 3x1/3x1...3 X - -
MBO2/MBO2E 3x(1/...3) - X -
Table 39: 9100 BTS Outdoor Multiband (GSM 850/1900) Configurations
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 123 / 234
8 Configurations
8.3 BTS 9110 ConfigurationsAll BTS 9110 configurations use one MSUM module. The differentconfigurations are due to the required number of carriers, the number of BTS9110 slave units and therefore MTRE modules. These MTRE modules areconnected to the antennae using one or more MAN modules.
The following table lists all possible BTS 9110 configurations.
GSM 900 GSM 1800
1x1...2, 2 W Single Antenna 1x1...2, 2 W, Single Antenna
1x1...4, 2 W, Single Antenna 1x1...4, 2 W, Single Antenna
1x1...6, 2 W, Single Antenna 1x1...6, 2 W, Single Antenna
2x1...2, 2 W, Single Antenna 2x1...2, 2 W, Single Antenna
1x1...4 + 1x1...2, 2 W, Single Antenna 1x1...4 + 1x2, 2 W, Single Antenna
3x1...2, 2 W, Single Antenna 3x1...2, 2 W, Single Antenna
1x1...2, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1) 1x1...2, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1)
1x1...4, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1) 1x1...4, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1)
1x1...6, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1) 1x1...6, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1)
2x1...2, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1) 2x1...2, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1)
3x1...2, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1) 3x1...2, 4.5 W, Low Loss (1)
Multiband GSM 900/1800 (2) -
1x1...2/1x1...2
1x1...4/1x1...2
1x1...2/1x1...4
-
(1) ’Low loss’ configurations are only possible with antenna network type2 (MAN2), which means that ’low loss’ configurations have two antennaaccesses.
(2) Each band can be configured either in 2 W or in 4.5 W.
Table 40: 9110 Micro BTS Configurations
124 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
8.4 9110 Micro BTS-E ConfigurationsAll 9110 Micro BTS-E configurations use one MSUMA module. The differentconfigurations are due to the required number of carriers, the number of9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS slave units and therefore MTRE modules.These MTRE modules are connected to the antennae using one or moreMAN modules.
The following table lists all possible 9110 Micro BTS-E configurations.
GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
1x1...2, Single Antenna 1x1...2, Single Antenna 1x1...2, Single Antenna 1x1...2, Single Antenna
1x1...4, Single Antenna 1x1...4, Single Antenna 1x1...4, Single Antenna 1x1...4, Single Antenna
1x1...6, Single Antenna 1x1...6, Single Antenna 1x1...6, Single Antenna 1x1...6, Single Antenna
2x1...2, Single Antenna 2x1...2, Single Antenna 2x1...2, Single Antenna 2x1...2, Single Antenna
2x1...4, Single Antenna 2x1...4, Single Antenna 2x1...4, Single Antenna 2x1...4, Single Antenna
2x1...6, Single Antenna 2x1...6, Single Antenna 2x1...6, Single Antenna 2x1...6, Single Antenna
1x1...4 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
1x1...4 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
1x1...4 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
1x1...4 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
3x1...2, Single Antenna 3x1...2, Single Antenna 3x1...2, Single Antenna 3x1...2, Single Antenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...4, SingleAntenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
3x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
3x1...4, Single Antenna 3x1...4, Single Antenna 3x1...4, Single Antenna 3x1...4, Single Antenna
4x1...2, Single Antenna 4x1...2, Single Antenna 4x1...2, Single Antenna 4x1...2, Single Antenna
1x1...6 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
1x1...6 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
1x1...6 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
1x1...6 + 1x1...2, SingleAntenna
2x1...4, Single Antenna 2x1...4, Single Antenna 2x1...4, Single Antenna 2x1...4, Single Antenna
1x1...4+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
1x1...4+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
1x1...4+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
1x1...4+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
1x1...4+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
1x1...4+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
1x1...4+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
1x1...4+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 1x1...6, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
2x1...2+ 2x1...3, SingleAntenna
2x1...6, Single Antenna 2x1...6, Single Antenna 2x1...6, Single Antenna 2x1...6, Single Antenna
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 125 / 234
8 Configurations
GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
5x1...2, Single Antenna 5x1...2, Single Antenna 5x1...2, Single Antenna 5x1...2, Single Antenna
6x1...2, Single Antenna 6x1...2, Single Antenna 6x1...2, Single Antenna 6x1...2, Single Antenna
- 1x1...2, Low Loss (1) 1x1...2, Low Loss (1) -
- 1x1...4, Low Loss (1) 1x1...4, Low Loss (1) -
- 1x1...6, Low Loss (1) 1x1...6, Low Loss (1) -
- 2x1...2, Low Loss (1) 2x1...2, Low Loss (1) -
- 2x1...4, Low Loss (1) 2x1...4, Low Loss (1) -
- 2x1...6, Low Loss (1) 2x1...6, Low Loss (1) -
3x1...2, Low Loss (1) 3x1...2, Low Loss (1) -
- 3x1...4, Low Loss (1) 3x1...4, Low Loss (1) -
- 4x1...2, Low Loss (1) 4x1...2, Low Loss (1) -
- 5x1...2, Low Loss (1) 5x1...2, Low Loss (1) -
- 6x1...2, Low Loss (1) 6x1...2, Low Loss (1) -
- Multiband GSM900/1800 (2)
- -
- 1x1...2/1x1...2
1x1...4/1x1...2
1x1...2/1x1...4
- -
Multiband GSM 900/1800 (2)
126 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
8 Configurations
GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
- 1x1...2/1x1...2
1x1...4/1x1...2
1x1...2/1x1...4
1x1...4/1x1...4
1x1...6/1x1...2
1x1...2/1x1...6
1x1...6/1x1...4
1x1...4/1x1...6
1x1...6/1x1...6
(1) ’Low loss’ configurations are only possible with antenna network type 2 (MAN2), which means that ’lowloss’ configurations have two antenna accesses.
(2) Each band can be configured either in 2 W or in 4.5 W.
Table 41: 9110 Micro BTS-E Configurations
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 127 / 234
8 Configurations
128 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9 Antenna Network
This chapter describes the AN/MAN functions and software. It providesinformation about the AN/MAN:
Functions
External interfaces
Modules
Software implementation.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 129 / 234
9 Antenna Network
9.1 Introduction to Antenna NetworkThe main functions of the AN/MAN are:
Downlink:
Isolation of the transmitters from the receivers
Combining the output of two transmitters to allow them to share asingle antenna
Duplexing to allow transmitters and receivers to share the same antenna
Power Coupling and Detection (9100 BTS only) to sample the VSWR
forward and reflected power.
Uplink:
Pre-amplification to amplify the received signals and control the overall
gain of the antenna network
Splitting to distribute the received signals to a pair of receivers.
The AN modules are part of the 9100 BTS and the MAN modules are part ofthe 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS.
9.1.1 9100 BTS Modules
There are five types of AN module, called ANX, ANC, AGC, ANB and ANY. Thepurpose of these modules is to connect the TREs to the antennae.
Reduced configurations with antenna diversity and up to two TREs can usethe ANB. Configurations with antenna diversity and two or more TREs alwaysuse at least one ANX or ANC/AGC. More TREs can be connected to theantenna by first connecting them to an ANY. The ANY is then connected to anANX or ANC/AGC. One or more ANY are used depending on the number ofTREs in the BTS 9100 configuration. See Section 9.2 for more informationabout possible configurations.
9.1.2 BTS 9110/9110-E Modules
There are two types of MAN module for the BTS 9110/9110-E.
The MAN1/MANM is used to connect two TRX modules to a single antenna.It comprises a combiner, a duplexer, and a low-noise amplifier with powersplitter. This is shown in Figure 23.
The MAN2/MAND is available in dual form. It is a low loss variant and isused to connect two TRX modules to two antennae without a combiner. Thisvariant comprises two duplexers and two low-noise amplifiers, both with powersplitters. This is shown in Figure 24.
130 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.2 Antenna Network FunctionsThe functions for the 9100 BTS and the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTSare described separately.
The principal functional entities contained in the AN/MAN are described inthe following table.
Functions Description 9100
9110MicroBTS/9110-EMicroBTS
ANCON/ANCC/AGCC/AGCRI
The Antenna Network Controller controls the configurationand initialization of the AN software. It also controls the uplinkpre-amplification of the received RF signals.
The ANCON/ANCC/AGCC includes a directional coupler andVSWR receiver to measure forward and reflected transmitterpower. The measurement is performed for all bursts with outputpower less than Power Step 9. This is because of the limitedisolation between the transmission and reception parts of the AN.
If more than 25% of the measurements exceed a pre-definedthreshold, the ANCON/ANCC/AGCC/AGCRI raises an alarm.This alarm causes the TRE transmitters to be switched off.
The AGCC controlls the power for two TMAs via an overcurrentprotection circuit.
The AGCRI performs only the sector selection, RF cablingdetection, remote power ON/OFF and remote inventory functions.
Y N
Combiner The Combiner concentrates two TRE/MTRE transmitter outputsinto a single RF output, thus reducing the number of antennaerequired.
The two Combiners used in the ANY module allow the outputsfrom four TREs to be fed into the two inputs of a single ANXmodule.
The two Combiners used in the ANC/AGC module allow theoutputs from four TREs to be fed into one ANC/AGC module.
In the ANB module no combiners are used, each TRE output isfed to one antenna.
The Combiners in the MAN1 allow the outputs from two TRXsto be fed to a single antenna.
Y Y
Divider The Dividers split and distribute the received RF signals fromthe antenna. The ANC, AGC and ANX modules provide twooutputs for each antenna input. This process can be continuedby the ANY module to provide four outputs from the receivedsignal. Each output is connected to a different TRE input, toprovide diversity. The MAN1 provides two outputs and the MAN2provides four outputs.
Y Y
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 131 / 234
9 Antenna Network
Functions Description 9100
9110MicroBTS/9110-EMicroBTS
Duplexer The Duplexers provide the coupling function for the transmittedand received RF signals. Each duplexer provides a bi-directionalsignal path, allowing a single antenna to be used for thetransmission and reception of uplink and downlink signals.
The Duplexer includes a filter unit to suppress spurious emissionsand transmitter noise that could interfere with the receivefrequency bandwidth.
Y Y
LNA The LNA amplifies the received signals. It has a fixed nominalgain value. The LNA has an extremely low Noise Factor and goodvalues for VSWR, compression and reliability.
Y Y
Table 42: AN / MAN Principal Functional Entities
132 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.2.1 9100 BTS Functions
The ANX and ANY functions and interfaces are shown first, followed by amapping of AN functions on its functional entities.
9.2.1.1 ANX/ANY Functions and InterfacesThe following figure shows the ANX and ANY principal functions and theirinterfaces.
BSII
BCB
TX
CLKI
Duplexer
Divider
ANCON
RI
Duplexer
Divider
Combiner
Divider
RI
Combiner
Divider
Divider
Divider
ANY ANX
XRF to ANT B
XRF to ANT ARX
RX
RX
RX
BCB
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
RFI to/from TRE
RFI to/from TRE
TX
TX
RX
RX
RFI to/from TRE
TX
RX
RX
RFI to/from TRE
LNA
LNA
Figure 22: ANX and ANY Functions and Interfaces
The ANC and AGC are a combination of ANX and ANY in one module.
The ANB is an ANC without the combiner.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 133 / 234
9 Antenna Network
9.2.1.2 9100 BTS Functions to Entities MappingThe following table shows how the 9100 BTS AN functions, described inTelecommunication Functions - RF (Section 5), map onto the AN functionalentities.
Functions Combiner Duplexer DividerANCON/ANCC/AGCC /AGCRI
Configuration/Initialization - - - X
Software Replacement - - - X
Downlink Isolation - X - -
Downlink Combining X - - -
Downlink Duplexing - X - -
Downlink PowerCoupling/Detection**
- - - X
Uplink Antenna Pre-amplification - - - X
Uplink Signal Splitting (Duplexing) - - X -
TMA Power Supply Control* - - - X
ANCON : ANCON board is used in ANX module
ANCC : ANCC board is used in ANC module
AGCC : AGCC board is used in AGC module
* : Only provided by AGCC
** : Not provided bythe AGCRI
Table 43: Distribution of AN Functions between AN Functional Entities
134 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.2.2 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Functions
The MAN functions are interfaces are described first, followed by afunction-to-functional entity mapping.
9.2.2.1 MAN Functions and InterfacesThe following figures show the MAN principal functions and interfaces, both for9110 Micro BTS and 9110-E Micro BTS.
Even if these functional descriptions are identical, the MANxx module for9110-E Micro BTS is not the same that the MANxx module for 9110 Micro BTS.
Combiner
Divider
Duplexer
LNA
TX1
TX2
RX1
RX2
AntennaXRF
Figure 23: MAN1 / MANM for Two TRXs with One Antenna Without Diversity
Divider Duplexer
LNA
TX1
RX1
RX2
Antenna
TRE 1
TRE 2
DividerDuplexer
LNA
TX2
RX1
RX2
Antenna
XRF
XRF
Figure 24: MAN2 / MAND for Two TRXs with Two Antennas With Diversity
9.2.2.2 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Functions to Entities MappingFor the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS, all of the MAN functions map ontothe MAN functional entity.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 135 / 234
9 Antenna Network
9.3 Antenna Network External InterfacesThe AN/MAN exchanges data with external entities through the links describedin the following table.
Interface Description 9100
9110MicroBTS/9110-EMicroBTS
BCB The BCB is used to exchange information and data betweenthe OMU and the AN. The BCB allows the OMU to perform autoidentification and remote inventory functions.
Y N
BSII The BSII is used to transfer O&M messages from the OMU tothe AN. These IOM messages are used for software download,transfer of configuration data, error and alarm collection,etc. The BSII also allows the OMU to broadcast IOM_CONFinformation to the AN.
Y N
CLKI The CKLI receives timing from the TRANS/CLOCK forall functions in the AN. The clocks are supplied by theTRANS/CLOCK Unit.
Y N
RFI The Radio Frequency Interface connects the TRE/MTREs tothe AN/MAN modules. Each TRE/MTRE has its own RFI whichconsists of three lines, one TX and two RX, or two lines for the9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS fitted with a MAN1 and noantenna diversity.
Y Y
XRF The XRF is the interface between the AN/MAN and theantennae and is functionally identical to the Air Interface.
Y Y
Table 44: AN/MAN External Interfaces
136 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.4 Antenna Network ModulesThe BTS module variants are described separately.
9.4.1 9100 BTS Modules
The four types of AN module, ANX, ANY, ANC, AGC and ANB are available asGSM 850, GSM 900, GSM 1800, or GSM 1900 variants, see the following table.
No. ofAntennas GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
2 ANXG ANXD ANXP
ANYL
-
ANYG
ANYGH
ANYD
ANYDH
ANYP
-
ANCL ANCG,ANCGP*
ANCD ANCP
AGC08 AGC9E,AGC9P*
AGC18 -
- ANBG ANBD -
* : Availablle only for GSM 900 Primary band
Table 45: AN Module Variants
Not all AN functions are concentrated on each AN module.
The following table lists the AN functions of the 9100 BTS against the ANmodules that physically contain those functions.
Functions Module
Configuration/Initialization ANX, ANC, AGC, ANB
Software Replacement ANX, ANC, AGC, ANB
Downlink Isolation ANX, ANC, AGC, ANB
Downlink Combining ANY, ANC
Downlink Duplexing ANX, ANC, AGC, ANB
Downlink Power Coupling/Detection ANX, ANC, AGC, ANB
Uplink Antenna Pre-amplification ANX, ANC, AGC, ANB
Uplink Signal Splitting (Duplexing) ANX, ANY, ANC, AGC, ANB
Table 46: AN Functions and Modules
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 137 / 234
9 Antenna Network
9.4.2 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Modules
The MAN module is available as GSM 850, GSM 900, GSM 1800 or GSM1900 variants, see the following table.
No. ofAntennas GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
1 MAN1G MAN1E MAN1D -
2 MAN2G MAN2E MAN2D -
Table 47: MAN Module Variants for 9110 Micro BTS
No. ofAntennas GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
1 MANML MANME MANMD MANMP
2 MANDL MANDE MANDD MANDP
Table 48: MAN Module Variants for 9110-E Micro BTS
All MAN functions of the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS are concentratedon each MAN module.
138 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.5 Antenna Network Software ImplementationThe AN software is described in terms of functions. The AN functions areimplemented in firmware and software.
9.5.1 Firmware
The AN firmware functions are:
AN auto-tests
Retrieving the IOM mapping from the BSII
Establishing a connection with the SUM on the IOM.
Dialog with the SUM for:
Reporting the failure of the auto-tests
Reporting the cause of the AN start up
Downloading the AN files.
Launching the AN software.
The AN firmware uses the BSII for retrieving the IOM_CONF and for theO&M dialog with the SUM.
9.5.2 Software
The ANCON/ANCC/AGCC software is used to maintain operation of the AN.It supports the following functions:
Retrieving the IOM mapping from the BSII
Establishing a connection with the SUM on the IOM
Dialog with the SUM for:
Receiving commands (reset, restart, configuration)
Reporting the execution of commands
Reporting faults
Reporting an auto-restart.
Supervising the VSWR and reporting alarms
Supervising the LNA gain and reporting alarms
Self-supervision.
AN software uses the BSII to retrieve the IOM for the O&M dialog.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 139 / 234
9 Antenna Network
9.6 Range Extension KitThe basic advantage of a Range Extension Kit installation is to enhance thecapabilities of the 9100 BTS in terms of coverage. This is done by increasing thesize of the cell which significantly impacts the density of sites to be implementedover the service area of GSM 900 networks. Other advantages are:
Range extension of road cell
Compensation of RF performance impairment due to antenna feederand ANx losses
Compensation of the eventual error of site location by radio network
planning.
The Range Extension Kit can be used with a wide variety of 9100 BTS indoorand outdoor configurations in GSM 900 with the constraint of coupling onlyone TRX/TRE to each antenna. Cross-polarized antennae can still be usedrespecting this constraint. For practical reasons, configurations are limited to amaximum of six TREs per BTS site assuming a 3x2 configuration.
The REK has been designed to minimize BTS and system impacts. The BTShas no knowledge of the REK presence and is not involved in its configuration.Configuration of the REK is reduced to manual attenuator setting at installation.Supervision is minimal. It only involves external alarms to the BTS and there isno recovery mechanism. The system impact concerns the handling of thesenew external alarms at OMC-R level.
The REK is composed of two modules:
A Masthead Amplification Box
A Power Distribution Unit.
140 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.6.1 Masthead Amplification Box
The Masthead Amplification Box is a bi-directional amplifier for one antennaport. It is designed for outdoor installation on a tubular mounted supportbelow the antenna.
The principle functional entities contained in the MAB are described in thefollowing table.
Functions Description
Circulator The circulator routes the TX signal coming from the antenna cable to the TX poweramplifier and the output signal of the LNA to the antenna cable.
Together with the output duplexer it has to prevent the masthead equipment fromself-oscillating.
Another function is to prevent the receive amplifier from generating intermodulation byreversely injected TX signals.
TX PowerAmplifier
The amplifier is made of one class A and two class AB stages. The output stage is aquadrature to improve the reliability and manufacturability of the design.
To adapt the amplifier to the different BTS types and antenna cable losses, a variableattenuator in front of the amplifier is available. The attenuator can be adjustedmanually.
A thermal protection/shut-down circuitry is incorporated in order to prevent theamplifier from damage in case of too high temperature inside the MAB.
RX Low NoiseAmplifier
The receiver amplifier is a balanced two-stage design, each arm containing twostandard LNAs.
A variable attenuator in front of the amplifier is available. It can be adjusted manually.
Temperature compensation is provided through a passive temperature variableattenuator on the amplifier output.
Duplexer The output duplexer is located at the antenna port and has to prevent the RX pathfrom being interfered with by the own TX signals and to suppress the TX noise inthe RX band.
A further function is the attenuation of TX harmonics if necessary.
BIAS T andLightningProtection
This circuit is located at both ends of each antenna cable, i.e. inside the MAB andPDU. The bias circuit is used for remote DC feeding and alarm signalling. It includes alightning protection.
DC PowerRegulation
A DC regulator is introduced to avoid gain fluctuations of the transmit power amplifierand the receive LNA. The amplifiers are DC fed via the feeder cable which introducesup to 3 V of voltage drop (depending on the cable length and DC current).
Alarm Circuitry Two alarms per TRX function are provided, one fatal and one non-fatal.
The fatal alarm is raised in case of a fatal failure (e.g. power amplifier out of order).
The non-fatal alarm is raised in case of a non-fatal failure (e.g. acceptableperformance degradation).
The signalling from the MAB to the PDU is done via the corresponding antenna cable.
Table 49: MAB, Principal Functional Entities
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 141 / 234
9 Antenna Network
9.6.2 Power Distribution Unit
The Power Distribution Unit provides the power supply and alarm interfacefor two Masthead Amplification Boxes. It is located at the BTS site, eitherwall-mounted close to the BTS in case of an indoor site or integrated inside theBTS cabinet in case of an outdoor BTS.
The principle functional entities contained in the PDU are described in thefollowing table.
Functions Description
Power DistributionUnit
The PDU includes two separate DC/DC converters, each providing one MAB withDC power.
BIAS T andLightningProtection
There is one BIAS T per feeder cable. It is used to DC feed the corresponding MABand to extract the alarms from the MAB. It includes a lightning protection to protectthe BTS.
Supervision andAlarm Circuitry
One fatal PDU alarm per TRX function is provided, if the power supply and supervisioncircuit detects a defective DC/DC converter.
The PDU collects the fatal alarms of the MAB and PDU for TRX1 and TRX2.
Non-fatal MAB alarms of TRX1 and TRX2 are grouped.
LEDs LEDs are provided on the front panel of the PDU to indicate the DC input status, MABalarms (fatal/non-fatal) and PDU alarms (fatal).
Reset Buttons During the installation process, one or more red LEDs can be activated. In this case,resetting the PDU is required.
Table 50: PDU, Principal Functional Entities
142 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.7 Tower Mounted AmplifierThe Tower Mounted Amplifier is used to increase the energy level receivedby the 9100 BTS from the mobile.
A significant part of the benefits brought by the outstanding sensitivity of the9100 BTS can be lost if the losses incurred by signals along the feeder cablebetween the receiving antenna and the antenna coupling module (ANxx) aretoo high. In fact, the noise factor of the system is degraded by an amountdepending on the feeder loss.
The basic idea of tower-mounted amplification is to implement a low-noiseamplifier as close as possible to the antenna, so as to compensate for all lossesincurred by received signals. The TMA solution can be used in GSM 900, GSM1800 or GSM 1900 indoor and outdoor configurations.
For TMA usage two solutions are available:
Tower Mounted Amplifier with external solution
Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC support.
9.7.1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution
Installation of a Tower Mounted Amplifier with external solution is composedof three separate modules:
A Tower Mounted Amplifier
A BIAS T module
A Power Distribution Unit.
9.7.1.1 Tower Mounted AmplifierThe Tower Mounted Amplifier is designed for outdoor installation on a tubularmounted support below the antenna. It is suited for GSM 900. GSM 1800,and GSM 1900.
As the transmit and receive path are duplexed by the BTS onto the samefeeder, the TMA has two duplexers integrated to separate the transmit andthe receive path. The transmit signal is bypassed to the antenna, while thereceive signal is amplified by a low-noise amplifier. The gain of the low-noiseamplifier depends on the frequency band.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 143 / 234
9 Antenna Network
There is no specific supervision and alarm circuit. The TMA is indirectlymonitored at the PDU by supervising the current supply of the TMA.
The principle functional entities contained in the TMA are described in thefollowing table.
Functions Description
Input Duplexer The input duplexer routes the TX signal coming from the antenna cable to a TXsignal filter and the output duplexer. It routes the output signal of the RX LNAto the antenna cable.
Together with the output duplexer it has to prevent the masthead equipmentfrom self-oscillating.
Another function is to prevent the receive amplifier from generatingintermodulation by reversely injected TX signals.
RX Low Noise Amplifier The TMA consists of an LNA for received signals with filters at both ends.
It has an integrated bypass in case of an amplifier failure.
Output Duplexer The output duplexer is located at the antenna port and has to prevent the RXpath from being interfered by the own TX signals and to suppress the TX noise inthe RX band.
A further function is the attenuation of TX harmonics if necessary.
Integrated BIAS T andLightning Protection
This circuit is integrated in the TMA at the BTS connection side. It is thecounterpart of the separate BIAS T module which is placed near the BTS. Theintegrated bias circuit is used as a DC separator for the amplifier energy supply. Itincludes a lightning protection.
Table 51: TMA, Principal Functional Entities
9.7.1.2 BIAS TThe BIAS T is a separate module used for insertion of the DC voltage in the RFantenna cable between the BTS and TMA to feed the amplifier of the TMA. It isthe counterpart of the integrated BIAS T inside the TMA. The separate BIAST is designed for indoor and outdoor installation. It can be combined with asurge arrestor to protect the BTS.
144 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.7.1.3 Power Distribution UnitThe Power Distribution Unit provides the power supply and alarm interfacefor up to six tower-mounted amplifiers. It is located at the BTS site, eitherwall-mounted close to the BTS in the case of an indoor site or integrated insidethe BTS cabinet in the case of an outdoor BTS.
The principle functional entities contained in the PDU are described in thefollowing table.
Functions Description
Power Distribution Unit The PDU includes three separate DC/DC converters, each providing two TMAswith DC power.
Supervision and AlarmCircuitry
An alarm indication informs the BTS if there is a:
Defective DC/DC converter
Malfunction of a tower-mounted amplifier
Connection error of the various cabling parts.
LEDs There are three kind of LEDs:
Orange (1x), indicates the presence of main power
Green (3x), indicate the presence of secondary power, i.e., the PDU is OK.
Red (6x), indicate a failure of the corresponding tower-mounted amplifier or aconnection error of the various parts of the cabling.
Switches A main power switch can be used to switch the main power on or off.
Additionally, six output channels can be switched on/off separately.
Reset Buttons Each channel has a separate reset button to reset the corresponding red LED,which may have been set during the switching-on procedure. The PDU is alsofitted with a main reset button to reset all channels used in a single action.
Table 52: PDU, Principal Functional Entities
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 145 / 234
9 Antenna Network
9.7.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support
9.7.2.1 Functions and FeaturesThe TMA is designed to compensate the feeder losses which significantlyimpacts the density of sites.
The BTS cabinet sited AGC is the front-end to the TMA. It provides theintermediate RF stage between the TREs and the antenna.
The hardware (Bias T) for supplying an external TMA for the reception pathis integrated. If a TMA is used, the RF signaling is routed first to the TMAand then to the antenna.
In the transmit path the bandpass filter to the antenna provides the followingfeatures:
Suppression of spurious and noise signals from the out of band transmitter(s)
Suppression of intermodulation products
Rejection of transmitter harmonics
Isolation to the reception branch.
In the receive path, the incoming signal from the antenna:
Passes the RX ANT filter
Is amplified by the integrated LNA
Is fed to the receivers in the BTS.
The power for the two TMAs, provided by the AGC, can be switched on and offby variable settings. Between others, the controller of the AGC is in charge ofsupervision of the TMA supply power. This current supervision is done withan Overcurrent Protection Circuit, which includes a current sense amplifier,a comparator and an internal voltage reference. The current sense circuithas a comparator with a latched output, it gives an over current alarm if thecurrent is higher than a pre-set limit.
For more details see the 9100 BTS Hardware Description.
146 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
AGC Gain Tuning
The TMA RX Gain and the Feeder Loss setting values are used to tune the RFinput levels via the AGC gain to match the TMA behaviour.
The algorithm is as follows:
AGC Rx Gain = Total Rx Gain - (TMA Rx Gain - Feeder Loss - Jumper Loss)
TRE
TRE
AGC
BTS
Duplexer
Duplexer
TMA
AGC Power Supply, Switching andSupervision
Bias
Bias
AdjustableAGC Rx Gain
Feeder Cable Loss
FixedTMA Rx Gain
Bias
Duplexer
Duplexer
TMA
Bias
Figure 25: TMA with AGC, Receive and Power Supply Principle
Settings
The TMA setting values are stored in the Remote Inventory memory of theXIOB. In case of an outdoor cabinet it is located on the OUTC module, forindoor it is located on the XIBM module.
If low and high threshold of each DC output setting is > 0 (null), then theAGC power supply output to the TMA is switched on and the current value issupervised. If a threshold is 0, the output to the TMA is switched off physicallyand logically.
If setting values entered outside the valid range (0…255), the LMT rejectsthe input and shows this in an error window. There is no consistency checkof the values.
Supervision
The AGCPS measures the both DC currents to the TMA once per second.The current values are polled periodically approximately each minute from the
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 147 / 234
9 Antenna Network
SUMA. The values can be seen on the SBL “Module State” for RA1 andRA2 on BTS Terminal or OMC-R.
Note: The current values are not supervised in the first second after TMA connectionand power up. Initial TMA power up causes a short high inrush current, whichis normal but higher than the high threshold.
Short Circuit Portection
As a protection for the AGCPS a short circuit supervision disables the TMA ifthe current exceeds 300mA. In case of over-current (Short Circuit Alarm) thehardware automatically switches off the power supply of the according TMA. Ifthe short circuit alarm appears, then a TMA recovery action is started. After thedetection of the short circuit alarm, the AGC starts a single shot timer with aduration of 10 sec. When the timer expires, then the AGC tries permanently tore-enable the TMA power by resetting the TMA short circuit alarm.
9.7.2.2 Typical Values for TMA ParametersThe value range is principally( 0…255) (one byte).
Parameter Details
TMA (DC) low threshold (0…255) mA
default: 70 mA for unknown TMA data
0 for switch OFF
TMA (DC) high threshold (0…200) mA
default: 200 mA for unknown TMA data
TX loss default: 0
This value is not used in GSM
RX gain Should be taken from data sheets.
Feeder loss Should be taken from data sheets.
In case of jumper cable usage, a 0.5 dBloss must be added.
The AGC allows an inrush current of 2 A per TMA during initial power ON.
148 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
9 Antenna Network
9.8 GSM/UMTS Co-sitingA GSM cabinet and an UMTS cabinet can be installed at the same site.Normally all antenna feeder cables between antennae (A and B) and BTSshave to be installed separately for GSM and UMTS.
With the help of external diplexer filters at both ends of the feeder cables, theGSM (850/900/1800) band and UMTS band can be decoupled in order to usethe same feeder cable for both services.
The base station feeder cable of the GSM part and the UMTS part areconnected to the according BTS ports of the diplexer. Both signals passseparate bandpath filters of the diplexer. Then they are combined andcommonly available at the antenna connector of the diplexer.
The UMTS branch is additionally equipped with a BIAS circuit. This BIAS circuitallows the DC power supply (12 VDC) of a TMA using the RF feeder cable. Theappropriate PDU is part of the UMTS ANRU module.
The GSM part of the diplexer is decoupled from the UMTS BIAS circuit part.If both branches (GSM and UMTS) are equipped with a TMA, this externaldiplexer cannot be used. Then all the necessary equipment of a TMA (includingfeeders) have to be installed twice.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 149 / 234
9 Antenna Network
150 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
10 Station Unit Module
10 Station Unit Module
This chapter provides a description of the SUM/MSUM. It provides informationabout the SUM/MSUM:
Functions
External interfaces
Modules
Software implementation.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 151 / 234
10 Station Unit Module
10.1 Introduction to the Station Unit ModuleThe main functions of the SUM/MSUM are:
Transmission
Handling the Abis link
Multiplexing TCH data and RSL/OML data between the Abis Interfaceand BSII Interface
Supporting the Q1 link to the TSC.
Generation of clocks for all other BTS modules; either
Synchronization to an external clock reference (another BTS or fromthe Abis link), or
Internal frequency generation using high precision OCXO.
Generation and distribution of Frame Number
Central OMU control
Provision and handling of internal and external interfaces
BSII Interface handling.
10.2 Station Unit Module FunctionsThe principal functions of the SUM/MSUM are shown in the following figure.
Trans−mission
O&M
RI
Timing
BSII
BCB
Abis
MMI
XBCB(SUM only)
XCLK(SUM only)
CLKI
SUM/MSUMClock
Generation and Synchro−
nization
Figure 26: SUM/MSUM Functions and Interfaces
152 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
10 Station Unit Module
The following table shows how the different SUM/MSUM functions, describedfully in Transmission Functions (Section 3) and O&M and Support Functions(Section 6), are summarized in functional groups.
Functions Transmission Clock O&M
Configuration Management:
Central command control and handling
Configuration and initialization of TRE/MTRE and AN
software
Downloaded software replacement
Configuration parameter file management
Database maintenance
Hardware configuration management.
- - X
Fault Management:
Filtering of alarms
External alarm collection
Forwarding of alarms to the BSC for processing
Self-testing of the BTS
Translation of alarms to a GSM function-level format
Translation of high-level BSC commands.
Dedicated Alarm Handling
- - X
Clock and Frame Number Generation and Synchronization - X -
Frequency Hopping - - X
Transmission - Abis link:
Electrical interface providing a loop-back
Clock recovery from the PCM link
Framer for control and synchronization of frames
64 kbit/s time slot switch maps time slots onto TCH.
Transmission - Multiplexing TCH, and RSL/OML data
Transmission - support of Q1 link
X - -
Provision and Handling of internal and External Interfaces - - X
BSII Interface Handling X - X
Table 53: Grouping of SUM/MSUM Functions
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 153 / 234
10 Station Unit Module
10.3 Station Module External InterfacesThe SUM/MSUM exchanges data with external entities through the linksdescribed in the following table.
Abis Interfaces The Abis Interface provides the Transmission function with a 2 MHz reference clockfrom the BSC. Abis Interface 1 or 2 is used for TCH, RSL/OML signalling, Q1 andring control bits.
BSII The BSII comprises two physical links at 2 Mbit/s. It is used to:
Route information received on the Abis link to the involved entities. For example,
RSL, TCH and OML routed to TRE/MTRE and O&M.
Internal O&M functions. Communication between O&M and other entities (for
example, TRE/MTRE and AN/MAN using IOM link.
CLKI The CLKI provides the basic GSM clocks to all of the BTS modules. It consists oftwo signals:
CLKI_CLK which is a 2.167 MHz clock
CLKI_FRM which is the GSM frame signal multiplexed with the frame number.
BCB The BCB is used for:
Auto-identification and remote inventory functions
O&M functions to address entities that are not connected to the BSII or when
entities cannot be addressed on the BSII.
BTS Terminal The BTS Terminal provides a local MMI for operator control of the BTS. The BTSTerminal is also used to:
Handle local commands for the BTS
Monitor status and alarms of the BTS
Perform commissioning tests, such as calibrate the OCXO.
Refer to the BTS Terminal User Guide for more information about local operator controlof the 9100 BTS.
XCLK(SUM only)
XCLK is used to synchronize the BTS with an external master clock. Alternatively, itcan provide a Master Clock to a slave BTS.
XBCB(SUM only)
The XBCB is an external control bus used to control or supervise events. This bus is anextension of the BCB. It can be used to perform external RI with a suitable inventorytool at factory level.
Table 54: SUM / MSUM External Interfaces
10.4 Station Unit Module BoardsThe functions of the SUM are all concentrated on the SUMX, SUMA or SUMP.The MSUM functions are concentrated on the MSUM or MSUMA module.
154 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
10 Station Unit Module
10.5 Station Unit Module Software ImplementationThe SUMP/MSUM use two microprocessors, the SUMA/SUMX/MSUMA onlyone to run the software/firmware for the O&M and Transmission modules.
The SUM software is described in terms of functions.
10.5.1 O&M Function
The SUM software is the central node for the BTS O&M.
This means that the SUM software is in charge of the following O&M functions:
Downloading the BTS Master File, the SUM software, and the SUM SPF
Monitoring all modules within the BTS
Controlling all modules within the BTS
Interfacing between the BTS and the operator at the BSC or the BTSTerminal.
The main functions of the SUM software are:
Dialog with the BSC or BTS Terminal for:
Downloading BTS files
Executing operator commands
Reporting faults detected inside the BTS.
Broadcasting the IOM mapping
Connection to other modules for:
Sending and controlling commands to the modules
Downloading the files to the modules
Retrieving faults.
Calculating and transmitting the BSII configuration to the Transmission
function.
Controlling the BCB as master for:
Managing all components which use the BCB
Detecting the live insertion/extraction of modules
Activating the BCB polling of the low-level alarms from the module
connected to the BCB
Setting the output ports, e.g., power supplies.
Supervision of the BCB and BSII internal busses
Self supervision.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 155 / 234
10 Station Unit Module
The O&M software uses the following interfaces:
BSII which gives access to:
OML
IOM
IOM_CONF for the periodic IOM configuration broadcast.
BTS MMI for the dialog with the BTS Terminal.
BCB for ISL protocol conversion and physical layer control.
10.5.2 Transmission Function
The Transmission function controls the Abis link by performing managementand supervision, transmission and reception of data:
The Framer monitors conditions on the Abis link. These include frame and
multiframe synchronization, framing, and detection of alarms. The Framer ispolled by the Transmission processor and the Abis link status is stored for
use by other functions. The Framer can be configured to check for cyclicredundancy check errors on the Abis link.
The Time Slot Switch handles the mapping of the 64 kbit/s time slot.
The main function of the BSII Switch is to choose which of the two BSIIinternal interfaces is used for O&M data distribution and for the TCHs.
10.5.3 Clock Function
The Clock function controls the distribution of clocks within the BTS (for theTRE/MTRE and AN modules):
The Master Frequency Generator synchronizes the output of a voltage
controlled oscillator in the clock function with the external reference supplied
from the Abis link. This output is now used as the system master clock.
The CLKI is responsible for the distribution of the system master clock for
the TRE/MTRE and AN. It also distributes the Frame Clock and the FrameNumber to these modules.
156 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
11 Transceiver Equipment
This chapter provides a description of the TRE /MTRE. It provides informationabout the TRE/MTRE:
Functional entities
External interfaces
Modules
Software implementation.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 157 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.1 Introduction to Transceiver EquipmentThe main functions of the TRE/MTRE are:
Telecommunications Management
O&M Management.
11.2 Transceiver Equipment Functional EntitiesThe following figure shows the principal functional entities of the TRE/MTREtogether with their internal and external interfaces.
SCP
DEC
CLKI
BCB
ECPL
MMI
CGU
DEM
BED
TXP
MUX CUL
ENCT
MBED
RI
ENC
BSII
CUI
RF Loop
Frequency Hopping
RFI RX
RFI TX
Frequency Hopping
From AN/MAN
ToAN/MAN
Power Amplifier
Transmitter
Receiver
Figure 27: TRE/MTRE Functional Entities and Interfaces
158 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
The following figure shows the principal functional entities of the Twin TREtogether with their internal and external interfaces.
FLASH SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
FPGA
CPLD
FPGA
ECPL
SCP
DSP1
DSP2
IQMUX
CLKI
BSII
HFFI
FHL
To/from LALE
DEM ctrl.
Modulator/Filter / Bufferfor GSM, EDGE,enh. EDGE
Level & Bias
Ramping
TX Synth.Module
RX Synth.Module
SYS TXP
ENC
DEM
HPI
SYS
DEM
DEC
HPI
CUI
Frequency Hopping
RFI RX
RFI TX
Frequency Hopping
From AN
To AN
Power Amplifier
Transmitter
Receiver
Receiver
RFI RX
From AN
Power Amplifier
Transmitter
Frequency Hopping
CUIRFI TX
To AN
Figure 28: Twin TRE Functional Entities and Interfaces
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 159 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
The following tables show how the TRE/MTRE functions, described inTelecommunication Functions - Baseband (Section 4) and TelecommunicationFunctions - RF (Section 5) map onto the TRE/MTRE functional entities. Insome cases, a single function can be split between more than one entity.
Functions SCP MBED DEC DEM ENCT CUL CGU
Configuration/Initialization
X - - - - - -
SoftwareReplacement
X - - - - - -
Rate Adaptation - X X - X - -
Channel Encodingand Decoding
- - X - X - -
Interleaving/De-interleaving
- - X - X - -
Encryption/Decryption
X X X - X - -
Demodulation - - - X - - -
Antenna Diversity - X X X - - -
Radio Link Recovery X - - X - - -
Radio ResourceIndication
X - X - - - -
Paging X - - - - - -
DTX X - X - X - -
DRX X - X X - - -
QualityMeasurement
X - X - - - -
Power Control X - - - X - -
Clock Distribution - - - - - - X
ProtocolManagement
X - - - - - -
Radio ChannelManagement
X X X - X - -
Transcoder TimeAlignment
- - X - X - -
Frequency Hopping - - - - X X -
160 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
Functions SCP MBED DEC DEM ENCT CUL CGU
Channel Selectionand Conversion
- - - - X X -
Digital Pre-processing
- - - X - - -
Control the Status ofthe RF Hardware
- - - - X X -
Handle Control andAlarm Processing
- - - - X X -
Select High/LowGain Path on Uplink
- - - X - - -
Table 55: Distribution of TRE/MTRE Functions between TRE/MTRE Functional Entities (1)
Functions SCP DSP1 DSP2 FPGA CPLD CGU
Configuration/Initialization
X - - - - -
Software Replacement X - - - - -
Rate Adaptation - X X - - -
Channel Encoding andDecoding
- X X - - -
Interleaving/De-interleaving
- X X - - -
Encryption/ Decryption X X X - - -
Demodulation - - X X - -
Antenna Diversity - X X X - -
Radio Link Recovery X - X X - -
Radio ResourceIndication
X - X - - -
Paging X - - - - -
DTX X X X - X -
DRX X - X X X -
Quality Measurement X - X - - -
Power Control X X - - - -
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 161 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
Functions SCP DSP1 DSP2 FPGA CPLD CGU
Clock Distribution - - - - - X
Protocol Management X - - - - -
Radio ChannelManagement
X X X - - -
Transcoder TimeAlignment
- X X - - -
Frequency Hopping - X - - X -
Channel Selection andConversion
- X - - X -
Digital Pre- processing - - X X - -
Control the Status ofthe RF Hardware
- X - - X -
Handle Control andAlarm Processing
- X - - X -
Select High/Low GainPath on Uplink
- - X X - -
Table 56: Distribution of Twin TRE Functions between Twin TRE Functional Entities (1)
FunctionsFrequencyHopping Transmitter Receiver RF Loop
RF PowerAmplifier
Frequency Hopping X - - - -
RF CarrierGeneration
- X - - -
GMSK Modulation - X - - -
Up-conversion - X - - -
Power Amplificationand Power Control
- - - - X
Power Couplingand Detection
- - - X -
Signal Amplification - - X - -
162 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
FunctionsFrequencyHopping Transmitter Receiver RF Loop
RF PowerAmplifier
A-D Conversion - - X - -
Program theFrequencySynthesizers
X - - - -
Table 57: Distribution of TRE/MTRE/Twin TRE Functions between TRE/MTRE/Twin TRE Functional Entities(2)
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 163 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
The principal functional entities contained in the TRE/MTRE are described inthe following table.
This Entity... Does this...
SCP Handles the protocol management for Layers 2 and 3, which are used to implementO&M functions. See SCP Software Implementation (Section 11.5.1) for detailedinformation on the SCP functions.
MBED/DSP1 Multiplexes/demultiplexes. See Transceiver Equipment Software Implementation(Section 11.5) for detailed information on the MBED functions.
DEC/DSP2 Processes the uplink information carried by one time slot of the TDMA frame. SeeDEM, RXP and DEC (Section 11.5.3) for detailed information on the DEC functions.
CUL/CPLD Interfaces the ENCT to the analog functions. See CUL (Section 11.5.5) for detailedinformation on the CUL functions.
DEM/DSP1/DSP2 Processes the complex samples of the digital baseband corresponding to eightsequential time slots within a TDMA frame. See DEM, RXP and DEC (Section 11.5.3)for detailed information on the DEM functions.
ENCT/DSP1 Processes baseband data for the downlink. The ENCT includes the ENC and TXPfunctions. For detailed information on the ENCT, see
CGU All BTS clocks are derived from a master reference frequency. The master frequencyis generated in the Clock functions. The Timing functions in the CGU perform thefollowing operations in the BTS.
Timing Signal Generation: The CGU derives all BTS clocks from the master
frequency generator.
Clock Distribution: The synchronization clocks are distributed to the TRE/MTREanalog functions.
FrequencyHopping
Frequency hopping is performed by the hopping synthesizers. These synthesizersgenerate the RF frequencies for the transmitter.
Transmitter The transmitter combines GMSK/8-PSK modulation and Up-conversion functions. Themodulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into two baseband signals: I andQ. These signals are transformed into the RF band by the Up-converter.
Receiver The analog receivers perform the following functions:
Low noise amplification
Down-conversion
IF filtering
IQ demodulation
Baseband filtering.
RF Loop The RF Loop provides an analog test loop between the transmitter and receivers. Itperforms analog self-tests, mainly for start-up test purposes.
The RF Loop is not available on TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE/TGTxx.
RF PowerAmplifier
The RF Power Amplifier takes the RF signals from the Transmitter and isolates,regulates and amplifies them before passing them to the AN/MAN module.
Table 58: Principal Functional Entities of the TRE/MTRE/TWIN TRE
164 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.3 Transceiver Equipment External InterfacesThe TRE/MTRE/Twin TRE exchanges data with external entities through thelinks described in the following table.
Interface Description
RFI The Radio Frequency Interface connects the TRE/MTREs to the AN/MAN modules. EachTRE/MTRE/TWIN TREmodule has its own RFI which consists of three lines, one transmitterand two receivers, or two lines for the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS fitted witha MAN1/MANM and no antenna diversity. The TWIN TRE is considered as 2 x TREscontaining three lines for each module.
CLKI The CKLI distributes the timing reference for the TRE/MTRE/TWIN TRE. The clocks aresupplied by the TRANS/CLOCK.
BSII The BSII is used to transfer O&M messages from the SUM to the TRE/MTRE/TWIN TREs.These IOM messages are used for software download, transfer of configuration data, errorand alarm collection, etc. The BSII also allows the SUM/SUMA to broadcast IOM_CONFinformation to the TRE/MTRE/TWIN TREs. For the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS, italso provides an interconnection between the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS entitieswhen operating in a master/slave configuration with more than two TREs.
BCB The BCB is used to exchange information and data between the SUM and the TRE/MTREs.The BCB allows the SUM to perform auto identification and remote inventory functions. Forthe 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS only, it also provides an interconnection between the9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS entities when operating in a master/slave configurationwith more than two TREs.
MMI The MMI provides an interface to the TRE/MTRE/TWIN TRE for factory test purposes only.
Table 59: TRE/MTRE/Twin TRE External Interfaces
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 165 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.4 Transceiver Equipment ModulesThe TRE/MTRE/TWIN TRE functional units are contained on three boardslocated within the TRE/MTRE/TWIN TRE module. There are a number of typesof TRE/MTRE module for GSM 850, GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900operation for the BTS, as shown in the following table.
BTS GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
9100 TRGM TRDM TRPM
TRAL TRAG TRAD TRAP
TRAGE TRADE
TAGH TADH, TRDH
TAGHE TADHE
TGT08 TGT09 TGT18
9110 MicroBTS
MTRGM MTRDM
9110-EMicro BTS
MTREDAL MTREDAG MTREDAD MTREDAP
Table 60: TRE/MTRE/TWIN TRE Variants
166 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5 Transceiver Equipment Software ImplementationThe TRE/MTRE software provides control and baseband data processing,corresponding to Layers 1 to 3 in the GSM communications model.
The following figure shows the TRE/MTRE logical subsystem.
SCPBCBT
MUX
ENC
DEC
BED
TXP
DEM RXP
CUL
BCB
BSII
TCH
TCH
BBI
MBED
BBI
BBI BBI
BBI
ENCT
FHL CLKI
ECPL
CUI
Push Button
BBI
MMI
Figure 29: TRE/MTRE Logical Subsystem
The TRE/MTRE logical subsystem consists of several modules. Note thatalthough the BCBT is not a software module, a description of its functions isincluded for completeness. Refer to the appropriate section for informationabout each module, as well as the BCBT.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 167 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.1 SCP Software Implementation
The SCP firmware/software manages the O&M, synchronization andtelecommunication functions of the TRE/MTRE.
The O&M functions perform:
Configuration management
Fault management.
Refer to section 11.5.1.1 for more information on the O&M functions.
The synchronization function controls the Frame Number distribution to theLayer 1 entities.
The telecommunication functions control the:
Radio protocol between the network and the Mobile Station
Transmission protocol between the TRE/MTRE and BSC.
Refer to section 11.5.1.2 for more information on the telecommunicationsfunctions.
The SCP handles the protocol management for Layers 2 and 3, which are usedto implement the following O&M functions:
Radio channel management
Power control
Quality measurements
Paging
Maintenance
Time synchronization.
The SCP also manages the following:
Layer 2 — LAPDmThe LAPDm operates over the BTS-to-Mobile Station link. It is responsiblefor providing error-free, point-to-point communication using LAPDm frames(GSM rec. 04.06).
At Layer 2, LAPDm provides services for the following radio channels:
SDCCH
FACCH
SACCH.
On these channels, LAPDm performs connection establishment, datatransfer and connection release. Services to other radio channels arehandled at Layer 3 to avoid excessive transfers between Layers 2 and 3.LAPDm thus carries information between Layer entities, via the Air Interface.
Layer 2 — LAPDThe LAPD protocol operates over the Abis link between the BTS and BSC(GSM rec. 04.06). LAPD is responsible for ensuring error-free, point-to-pointcommunication between the BTS and the BSC. It also carries informationbetween Layer 3 entities via the subscriber network interface.
168 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.1.1 O&M FunctionsThe SCP O&M functions are implemented in firmware and software.
The SCP firmware:
Performs TRE/MTRE auto-tests
Retrieves the IOM mapping from the BSII
Establishes the connection with the SUM using the IOM
Dialogs with the SUM to:
Report the TRE/MTRE auto-tests in the case of failure
Report the cause of the TRE/MTRE start up
Download the TRE/MTRE files.
Launches the TRE/MTRE software.
The SCP software:
Manages configuration parameters
Manages reconfiguration parameters
Verifies software integrity
Controls the TRE/MTRE mode of operation
Supervises and manages faults
Supervises the LAPD link
Supervises processor overload
Performs RACH load measurements.
Supervises external interfaces (fault management)
Supervises Layer 1 entities (hardware and software failure)
Manages the exchange of messages between the SCP and otherTRE/MTRE entities.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 169 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.1.2 Telecommunications FunctionsThe SCP telecommunication functions are only implemented in the software.This software controls the radio protocol between the network and the MobileStation. It also controls the transmission protocol between the TRE/MTREand the BSC. The telecommunications software:
Handles the LAPD protocol
Handles the LAPDm protocol
Handles the Layer 3 protocol
Processes Telecommunications configuration messages
Manages Radio Channel
Performs the error handling of the telecommunications software
Manages the initialization of the Layer 1 entities
Manages the configuration of the Layer 1 entities
Manages the synchronization (frame number)
Manages the multiframe configuration
Routes the telecommunications messages.
11.5.2 ENCT
The ENCT is in charge of terrestrial link and radio channel functions:
On the terrestrial link side, the ENCT controls:
Rate adaptation
TRAU frames management
Transcoder time alignment.
On the radio channel side, the ENCT controls:
FHL calculation of time slot and link number
Control of the analog part including transmitter and receiver parts
FHL interface management
Encryption control
Forward error correction and encoding.
These functions are implemented in the ENC and the TXP and are described inmore detail in the following sections.
170 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.2.1 ENCThe ENC is in charge of the majority of the BTS downlink baseband functions.These functions are given below. Downlink baseband functions not mentionedhere are performed by the MBED.
The ENC software performs the following functions:
Control of the TCH interface with the MBED
Rate adaptation
Control of the remote transcoder
Control of the interface with the channel encoding function
Channel encoding
FACCH bit stealing
Burst building
Multiframe building
Burst control
TDMA frame multiplexing.
11.5.2.2 TXPThe functions of the TXP are:
Initialization of the TRE/MTRE analog part:
Synthesizer initialization
Minimization of Amplitude Modulation effects
Control of amplifier offset bias adjustment.
Online control of the TRE/MTRE analog functions, performed on behalf ofthe ENC:
Transceiver power ramping
Transceiver power control
VSWR supervision
Temperature supervision
Synthesizer programming and frequency hopping
Synthesizer lock detect supervision
Receiver attenuator setting
RF Loop (not available on TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE).
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 171 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.3 DEM, RXP and DEC
The DEM, RXP and DEC each require dedicated software. However, as theseblocks are structurally similar, a brief introduction is given for each.
11.5.3.1 DEM FunctionsThe DEM is in charge of collecting the receiver measurements e.g., TOAestimation and SNR estimation. It also takes in-band control information fromthe DEC and performs pre-processing, channel demodulation and equalizationon the received signal.
Functionally, the application software is separated into two parts:
DEM software
RXP software.
The RXP software is described separately in the next section.
The DEM processes the physical channels received on the uplink, and passesthe processed data to the DEC. The data is received as complex samplesfrom the ADC in the analog functions.
The DEM performs the following functions for each channel:
GMSK demodulation
Receiver-level calculations
High and low gain path selection
DC offset calculation and correction
Frequency translation
Carrier frequency offset compensation, estimation, filtering
Channel impulse response estimation
TOA estimation
Matched filtering
Equalization based on estimated channel impulse
Soft decision
SNR estimation
Channel state weighting
Testing.
There is also a Decryption function, which occurs just before the data is passedto the DEC. This is performed in the MBED, configured by the DEM software.
The SCP uses the ID_CHC messages to send the uplink decryption keys, thedecryption flag and the algorithm type flag to the DEM. The DEM extracts thisinformation, adds the frame number, and sends the combined data to theMBED. Only normal bursts are decrypted.
172 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.3.2 RXP FunctionsThe RXP processes the physical channels received on the uplink, and passesthe processed data to the DEM. The data is received from the A-D converter ascomplex samples.
The RXP functions are performed for each channel.
This function... Does this...
RF Data Input As the A-D converter finishes each conversion, it sends an interrupt to theprocessor. The processor then transfers the data from the A-D converterto an internal memory buffer.
Received Data Processing The data read from the A-D converter for each time slot is pre-processedto allow its subsequent demodulation. Data output for each time slotoccurs at the beginning of the next time slot. The data output for each timeslot is checked for inconsistencies that can indicate an error.
Receive Level Computationand High/Low Gain Selection
Four demodulation paths are provided by the analog functions. Two foreach of the pair of receiver signals obtained through antenna diversity.Each receiver signal contains a high and a low gain path that arepre-processed. If the low gain path has a sufficiently high RF power value,then it is demodulated. Otherwise, if the low gain path is too low, the highgain path is demodulated.
DC Offset Computation andCompensation
The RXP controls the application of DC offset to the pre-amplified I andQ signals. AM measurements from the analog functions are used by theRXP to calculate the DC of the I and Q signals. These values are passedto an analog subtraction unit which balances the amplitude of the I and Qsignals.
Frequency Translation To simplify the demodulation of the received signals, pre-processingis performed. This involves multiplying the A-D samples by a complexcoefficient before passing them to the DEM.
Fault Checking Ongoing checks are performed for each time slot during operation. Thesetests verify that data is sent to the uplink BSII, and that data is receivedfrom the analog part of the receiver. If these tests fail, or if no interruptsare detected, an alarm is sent to the SCP.
Table 61: RXP Functions
11.5.3.3 DEC FunctionsThe DEC is in charge of antenna diversity, speech, data; and signaling, andthe terrestrial link. For the DEM, the DEC performs in-band control andmeasurements pre-processing.
The DEC reassembles logical channels from the bursts of data receivedfrom the DEM.
It identifies bursts using channel configuration messages received from theSCP. The burst process is therefore controlled in real-time, using a specialoperating system.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 173 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
During burst processing, the DEC performs the following functions:
De-interleaving
Burst processing control
TOA filtering
Received signal level filtering
Decryption
Channel observations (interference, RSSI, SNR)
RACH load measurements.
The reassembled blocks are then processed using the following functions:
Convolutional decoding
Block decoding
Bit reordering
Deciphering of soft decision bits
Hard decisions of uncoded bits
Received signal quality estimation
Rate adaptation
Building of output frames
Filtering of Layer 2 fill frames
Ciphering state initialization for signalling frames
Indication of valid traffic frame decoding.
The data is then routed towards the BSC.
In addition, the DEC performs the following functions:
Handover management
Support of RF Loop Test
DEM configuration
BER measurements.
The DEC produces two parameters for signal quality. These relate tomeasurements made during a SACCH multiframe over a full set of TDMAframes, and a subset of TDMA frames, respectively. These two parametersare sent to the SCP.
174 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.4 MBED
The MBED performs the MUX and BED functions. It multiplexes/demultiplexesTRAU frames on the BSII. It also performs decryption/encryption key extractionand generation of the decryption/encryption masks. The MBED interfaces theuplink and downlink TCH and the LAPD RSL to the Abis Interface. This is donevia the BSII and the SUM/MSUM. Since these are transparent to the MBED,the MBED effectively provides a direct mapping of the data streams ontothe relevant Abis channels.
The MBED is in charge of the following functions:
CKLI Interface management including Frame Number reception
Multiplexing the ENCT and DEC external interfaces to the BSII
Generation of synchronization signals for the SCP
Timing control generation for the baseband processing
Decryption key extraction and generation of decryption mask
Encryption key extraction and generation of encryption mask.
11.5.5 CUL
The CUL interfaces the ENCT to the analog functions. The CUL, together withthe ENCT, performs supervision and control of the following functions:
Synchronization functions (the timing of all analog functions):
Power ramping control and synchronization
Synthesizer programming and synchronization
Supervision of lock detects, temperature and power
Power Amplifier calibration
Synchronization of the baseband data to the GMSK Modulator.
Synchronization and control functions:
Synchronization and control of Receiver attenuators
Synchronization and control of Receiver DC offset
Synchronization of IQ sampling.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 175 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
11.5.6 BCBT
The BCBT Communication module handles communication with the SUM viathe BCB.
The BCBT is in charge of handling:
Access to the RI EEPROM and obtaining the TRE/MTRE’s physical address
TRE/MTRE power supply control
RF cabling detection to determine the RF interconnection between TRE and
ANs. RF supervision is performed when the 9100 BTS is operational. Itdetects an interruption in the RF path.
Hardware protection for SCP Flash-EPROM
Routing of low level TRE/MTRE alarms and status to the SUM
JTAG access to SCP processor and memory to allow firmware downloading.
11.6 Transceiver Equipment Power ManagementThis section describes the transceiver equipment output power managementwhen power balancing feature is activated and for unbalanced configurations.
11.6.1 Transceiver Equipment Power Balancing
This section describes the transceiver equipment power balancing in a sector.
The TX power attenuation is used to take care of unbalanced hardwareconfigurations for 9100 BTSs. In case of 9110 Micro BTS and 9110-E MicroBTSs TX power attenuation is 0 dB so there is no need for power balancing.A power balancing for the GMSK power of the TREs in the sector is made.For the 8PSK power of the TREs in the sector a power balancing is made ina “best effort” way. Three steps must be made for this and these steps aredescribed in the following sections.
11.6.1.1 Determine the Attenuation Between TRE Modules and Antenna ConnectorDetermine the attenuation between TRE modules and antenna connector bytaking into account the attenuations due to coupling stages and cabling:
As the OMU/SUM can not detect the TRE- ANY connection, the attenuationto give to a TRE can be deduced using a rule based on the number of ANY"assumed” to be connected to a TRE.
Two types of unbalanced configurations are used:
Mixed configuration normal power TRE and high power TRE. In suchconfiguration, the normal power and high power do not have the same
power and do not have the same number of ANY stages between TRE andAN (there is one ANY less in normal power TRE)
Unbalanced configuration with different AN. In such configuration, the TRE
connected to different number of ANY are connected to different AN.
11.6.1.2 Balance the GMSK Power of the TREs in a SectorThe attenuation to be given to the TRE (for GMSK) is based on the followingrules:
176 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
11 Transceiver Equipment
Calculate the TX Power of each TRE at antenna output (or AN input) takinginto account the TRX power and the different losses (cables, ANY and AN)
Search for the TRE which has the lowest output power at this reference point
Attenuate all other TRE with the power difference to this TRE.
In order to take into account the case of a cell split over two BTSs, the CDMindicates per sector and frequency band the Maximum TX power requestedin order to have the same TX power for all TRE belonging to the same cellamong the two BTSs.
There are two cases:
The requested Maximum TX power is lower than the TX power calculated
above, then a supplementary attenuation is added in order that the final TXpower of the TRE is equal to the Maximum TX power
The requested Maximum TX power is equal or higher than the TX power
calculated above, then this requested Maximum TX power is ignored and analarm is generated in order to notify the system.
11.6.1.3 Balance the 8PSK Power of the TREs in the SectorThe 8PSK output power of a TRE is generally lower than the GMSK power.Once the GMSK power in a sector is balanced, the 8PSK power is balanced ina “best effort “ way. For each TRE, the 8PSK power is reduced to the GMSKsector power, if the value is higher. For modules with 8PSK power below GMSKsector power, no attenuation is applied. In order to notify the system, aboutpossible differences between GMSK and 8PSK power, this value, called “deltapower” is provided to the TRE that reports it towards the MFS for this purpose.The BSC determines this “delta power” internally for its own use.
For splitted cells, the 8PSK power is aligned to the Maximum TX Power ifit is higher, otherwise Maximum TX Power is ignored. The “delta power”reporting takes into account the balancing made between the two semi-sectorsof a splitted cell.
11.6.2 Unbalanced Configurations
In order to take benefit of the wide TRE portfolio and capacities a new featureis implemented to support unbalanced configurations on the same antennanetwork. Furthermore for three TRXs per AN configuration to permit the usageof two TRXs in combining mode on the first antenna path and to connect inby-pass mode the third TRX, on the second antenna path thus resulting in asort of concentric cell configuration.
The principle of the feature is to define a specific concentric cell in which theoutput power balancing is performed on a zone basis instead of on the sectorbasis. The major benefit of the feature is in rural regions as this will allowless expensive BTS for a certain coverage. When the feature is activated ona concentric cell, the BSS system ensures that the more powerful TREs aremapped on TRX configured on the outer zone, and the less powerful ones, onthe TRX configured on the inner zone.
Activating this feature brings as benefits:
Easier introduction of high power GMSK output power for better indoor
coverage and without need to have the whole sector equipped with TRXhigh power
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 177 / 234
11 Transceiver Equipment
Upgrade of two TRXs / cell in by-pass mode towards three TRXs withoutimpact on coverage and without need of low loss configuration.
The existing current mechanism described in Transceiver Equipment PowerBalancing (Section 11.6.1) is kept if the feature not activated.
178 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
This chapter describes the BTS start-up procedure and the initialization thatfollows.
After introducing the sequence of events that occur, it describes the followingprocesses:
SUM/MSUM Start Up
Software Download
Software Initialization.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 179 / 234
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
12.1 IntroductionWhen the BTS is powered up, reset or restarted, a fixed sequence of eventsoccurs.
There are several different scenarios and the one that is chosen depends on:
Whether or not the BTS has been reset or restarted
The reason that this reset/restart has occurred.
The main differences between the various reset/restart scenarios are:
Whether or not the BTS downloads the module software
How the software is activated after it has been downloaded.
The reasons for a reset/restart are:
BTS/SUM/MSUM Power-up
Restart BTS (SBL)
Restart OMU (SBL)
OMU auto-restart with/without OMU CPF replacement
Reset BTS
Reset OMU
OMU auto-reset.
180 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
Software Interaction Scenario (Section 15) contains diagrams showing thesequences for all of the BTS start-up scenarios. The following figure givesan overview of all BTS start-up scenarios and presents the internal states ofthe BTS O&M.
SUM bootstrap
BTS/OMU started Download SUM SW
Start SUM SW
Increment auto−restart
counter
Start Up, Reset or Restart
Reason
Download OMU CPF
RestartBTS
ReconfigureBTS
Download BTS files OMU CPF
BTS context recovery
ReconfigureBTS
SW Activate
Report Reason for Start Up, Reset, or Restart
(fault, command)
BTSOPERATIONAL
Start−up Reason (1)
(4) (5)(2) (3)(1), (6), (7), (8)
Start Up, Reset or Restart Reason
1234
BTS/SUM/MSUM Power−upRestart BTSRestart OMUOMU auto−restart without OMU CPF replacement
Reset/Restart Reason (6), (7), (8)
Reset/Restart Reason (2), (3), (4), (5)
5678
OMU auto−restart with OMU CPF replacementReset BTSReset OMUOMU auto−reset
Start Up, Reset or Restart Reason
Figure 30: Overview of all BTS Start-up Scenarios
The different scenarios share a number of common actions. To avoid excessiveduplication, the description is for the BTS power-up sequence as described inthe SUM/MSUM Start Up (Section 12.2). This sequence contains the majorityof the actions performed in any of the scenarios shown in Chapter 15.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 181 / 234
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
12.2 SUM/MSUM Start UpAfter power-up or a reset, the following actions are performed on theSUM/MSUM.
For the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS, only the MSUM of the master 9110Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS is powered up. The MSUM of the slave 9110Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTSs remain deactivated.
1. SUM Auto-test and Bootstrap
The SUM software is activated and performs an auto-test, then bootstrapprocedures are run on the SUM. The bootstrap procedures contain theoperating system and interface control code.
2. Abis Configuration ExchangeThe O&M function requests the Abis configuration from the transmissionfunction in order to establish a connection with the BSC. The informationrequired by the O&M function is the position of the OML, RSL and TCHs inthe Abis datastream.
The SUM software obtains the Abis configuration and stores it in non-volatilememory. The configuration is obtained from one of two sources:
The BSC via the Abis Q1 time slot
The BTS Terminal via the MMI.
3. BSII Configuration Exchange
The SUM software calculates the BSII configuration after each auto-reset orpower up. The OML, RSL and TCHs are assigned the same position on theBSII as they occupy on the Abis.
4. BSC ConnectionThe SUM is now able to establish the LAPD OML connection with the BSC.This link is between the BSC and the BIE.
5. BTS/OMU Started MessageThe SUM software sends an ’OMU Started’ message to the BSC. Themessage contains the reason for the BTS reset/restart. The BSC respondswith an acknowledgement message.
The BSC then begins the software download to the SUM over the LAPDOML connection.
182 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
12.3 Software DownloadThe BTS software download comprises:
BTS Master File
SUM Software Download
Other BTS Software Packages Download
Management of Software Versions.
Each of these is described in the following sections.
12.3.1 BTS Master File
The BTS software is transferred to the SUM in two parts. First, the BSC sendsthe BTS Master File, which contains a list of all the files needed by the BTS.These files are collectively called the BTS Software Package.
Note that the Master File is stored in RAM. Only one version of this file is everpresent in the BTS. Therefore it is not stored in Flash-EPROM.
12.3.2 SUM Software Download
The second part of the software transfer is the transmission of the BTSSoftware Package. The SUM software compares the list of files contained inthe BTS Master File with the files contained in the SUM Flash-EPROM. Theresult of this comparison is a list of files that need to be downloaded.
The SUM software then requests these files from the BSC. The files that aredownloaded are stored in the Flash-EPROM. These files are required for theperformance of both SUM and module functions.
After the BTS Software Package is downloaded, the LAPD OML connection tothe BSC is dropped and the SUM software starts.
12.3.3 Other BTS Software Packages Download
The downloading of the remaining BTS software is performed under control ofthe SUM software. The SUM re-establishes the LAPD SUM connection with theBSC using the OML time slot position previously stored in memory.
The SUM collects hardware data from the BTS modules to determine whichmodules are present and their hardware capabilities.
The SUM inspects the BTS Master file to determine the correct files to bedownloaded for each module that has been identified. These files are thendownloaded from the BSC and stored in Flash-EPROM.
A BTS_DOWNLOAD_REPORT message is sent to the BSC indicating theresult of the software download. The reason for the BTS reset/restart is alsoprovided.
This has an effect on the level of software activation required, either:
SUM software alone, or
SUM and module software.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 183 / 234
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
12.3.4 Management of Software Versions
The SUM can store up to two versions of the BTS Software Packages inFlash-EPROM. The SUM requests that a file be downloaded only when a newfile is needed. This is determined by comparing the file version listed in theMaster File against the version currently stored in Flash-EPROM.
A new file is downloaded when:
The correct version is not in Flash-EPROM
The correct version exists but has become corrupted.
When there are two versions of a file currently stored, downloading anotherversion causes the file with the oldest reference to be removed.
Note that the OMU_CPF is not stored in Flash-EPROM. Only one version ofthis file is present in the BTS.
Download files are transferred in packets. The SUM calculates checksums foreach packet and returns an acknowledgement to the BSC after a successfultransfer. Re-transmission is requested for any packets which are corrupted.
184 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
12.4 Software InitializationWhen the BTS software download is complete, the SUM activates the softwarein one of two ways:
OMU-(SBL) level software activation (for SUM software alone), or
BTS-level software activation (for SUM and module software).
The type of software activation depends on the content of theBTS_DOWNLOAD_REPORT message.
This message was sent to the BSC indicating the reason for the BTSreset/restart. The SUM first establishes the IOM connection to allowcommunication with the modules. It then performs one of the two types ofsoftware activation.
After the software has been activated, the SUM sends two messages to theBSC. The first message is the BTS_CONF_COMPL message (configurationcompletion report) which contains configuration error messages. The secondmessage is the BTS_SW_ACTIVATE_REPORT. This provides an overallreport of the results of the software initialization, together with a reminder ofthe reason for the BTS reset/restart.
The following figure shows the common actions that occur in both SUM-leveland BTS-level software activation.
BTS Modules Initialization
SUM SW ModulesBSC
Start of IOM_CONF Broadcast by SW
Time
BTS (SBL) Level Software Activation
BTS_SW_ACTIVATE_REPORT
BTS_SW_ACTIVATE_REQ
BTS_CONF_REQ
BTS_CONF_DATA
BTS_CONF_COMPL
BTS Context RecoveryBTS Modules Reconfiguration
OMU−(SBL) Level Software Activation
Figure 31: Software Activation
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 185 / 234
12 BTS Start Up and Initialization
186 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13 BTS Objects
This chapter describes the managed objects for the BTS. It provides theallowed states for both managed objects and SBLs. It maps managed objectsand SBLs to the corresponding RIT.
It provides for both Managed Objects and SBLs:
Hierarchy
Allowed states
Allowed actions
RITs
Managed Objects/SBL to RIT relationships.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 187 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.1 BTS Managed Objects and SBLsThe following table lists the Managed Objects and SBLs for the BTS9110/9110-E and BTS 9100.
Managed Object SBL Type Description
BTS BTS Base Transceiver Station
CCF CCF Cabinet Cooling Fan (always set to NEQ for 9110 MicroBTS/9110-E Micro BTS because there are no fans)
CLLK CLLK Clock Link
EACB EACB External Alarm Collection Board
OMU OMU Operations and Maintenance Unit
RA RA Radio Access
TRE TRE Transceiver Equipment (exists externally, maps internally toCU SBL)
Table 62: 9100 BTS and 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS Managed Objects and SBLs
188 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.2 BTS Managed Objects and SBLs DescriptionThe following table describes the Managed Objects and SBLs in terms ofthe functions:
Telecom
O&M
Hardware mapping.
ManagedObjects SBL Function Description
BTS BTS Telecom None.
O&M Supports all configuration management actions performed on BTSequipment.
The SBL also collects general BTS alarms (e.g., loss of Q1 orToken Bus).
HardwareMapping
BTS equipment.
CCF CCF Telecom None.
O&M Cools down the BTS boards to maintain them within theirenvironmental temperature range.
HardwareMapping
BTS cooling fans equipment.
CLLK CLLK Telecom None.
O&M Provides the whole BTS with four clocks signals derived from the13 Mhz master frequency. Those signals are delivered via a bustype link to the frame units, the carrier units and the frequencyhopping units.
The clock signals are the basic timing for TDMA.
HardwareMapping
Frequency generator and clock distribution units.
CU CU Telecom Transforms a baseband signal into an UHF signal on the transmittingside and vice versa on the receiving side. The UHF value isconfigured by the OMU/SUM from an OMC-R command.
The SBL also measures the strength of the received signal.
O&M Measures regularly the VSWR . When the VSWR is too high, itautomatically disconnects the transmitter.
HardwareMapping
Carrier Units (transmitter/receiver boards and power sources).
A transmitter/receiver board contains the GSM/DCS modulator,UHF up/down converter and amplifiers.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 189 / 234
13 BTS Objects
ManagedObjects SBL Function Description
EACB EACB Telecom None.
O&M Performs the following actions:
Sends to the OMU/SUM environmental alarms such as fire,
smoke, intrusion, overheating, etc
Commands the shutdown or activation of the BTS power supplies
Switches the BCCH to the spare combiner
Triggers the change-over to the redundant amplifier
Distributes the Q1 bus to the carrier units and to the extension
cabinets of the BTS.
HardwareMapping
EACB equipment.
FHU FHU Telecom Switches each time slot of a TDMA frame between the FUs andthe CUs tuned to different frequencies, according to a frequencyhopping algorithm.
O&M None.
HardwareMapping
FHU.
FU FU Telecom Handles the following layers:
Layer 1 - the electrical interface from the CU as well as the 2Mbps interface from the Abis interface
Layer 2 - the LAPD and LAPDm protocols
Layer 3 - part of the RR signalling from mobile side RSL.
O&M For a specified time slot it:
Provides configuration parameters
Computes online the results of the FU-CU loop test
Computes (on triggered basis) the results of the radio loop test
Performs measurements (processor load, interference level,
etc.).
HardwareMapping
FU boards.
FU_TS Telecom None.
O&M Addresses a particular baseband channel of the FU particularly forconfiguration purposes.
Performs RTE loop test on addressed baseband channels.
190 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
ManagedObjects SBL Function Description
HardwareMapping
None.
OMU OMU Telecom None.
O&M Main functions are:
Initializes and configures the BTS
Collects and reports alarms to the BSC
Transfers SW and data files to the FUs
Triggers the BTS channels configuration in case of a failure
Tests triggering at the other parts of the BTS
Communicates with local terminal.
HardwareMapping
OMU/SUM board.
RA RA Telecom Models the up and down interface to the transmit/receive antennae.
Receive:
Filters the signal from the antennae to remove unwanted signals
outside the GSM band
Amplifies the filtered signal
Performs signal splitting by multi-coupling to allow each receiver
to pick up its own signal.
Transmit:
Couples to the transmitting antennae all analog signals coming
from the carrier units.
Optionally, it is also able to switch the BCCH carrier unit to a
spare combiner, on an OMU/SUM command.
O&M Tunes the cavities if RTCs are used.
Measures the VSWR regularly.
HardwareMapping
Receiver Front-End
FU power supplies
CU power supplies
Transmission combiners rack (cavities + cabling)
BCCH switch.
RTE Telecom None.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 191 / 234
13 BTS Objects
ManagedObjects SBL Function Description
O&M Loops the RF signal of a specified time slot from the transmittingend to the receiving end.
Activates the connection between the transmitter combiner and thereceiver front end input under the control of the OMU/SUM.
HardwareMapping
RTE
Table 63: Managed Objects and SBL Descriptions
192 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.3 BTS Managed Objects (SBL) HierarchyThe Managed Objects (SBL) hierarchy reported by the BTS to the OMC-Ris shown in the following figures. All Managed Objects (SBLs) are reportedby the OMU/SUM except the FU_TS, which is not reported in hardwareconfiguration data.
In addition to the Managed Objects (SBL) hierarchy within the BTS, theOMU/SUM also reports the following information to the OMC-R:
Relationship between Frame Unit and LAPD - RSL. It indicates the TEI valueused by the Frame Unit
The relationship between OMU and LAPD - OMU, by indicating the
corresponding TEI value (always 1)
RA configuration parameters, such as type of combiners and BTS power
class
BTS configuration (Master BTS/Slave BTS)
BTS hardware family (9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS and 9100 BTS).
Note: The following SBL hierarchies show only those SBLs reported to the OMC-R.
12345678901234567890123451234567890123456789012345123456789012345678901234512345678901234567890123451234567890123456789012345
123412341234
123412341234
123412341234
BTS
CLLKOMU123451234512345
CCF* EACB*
12345123451234512345
RA*
*: means that the box represents several instances of the SBL.
There can be to 6 sectors, FHU is always IT.
123123FU*
123123CU*
123456789123456789123456789ABIS−HWAY−TP
123123TRE*
123123RA*
at OMC−R
Figure 32: 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS/9100 Managed Objects (SBL)Hierarchy Reported by the OMU/SUM to the OMC-R
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 193 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.4 Allowed Managed Object/SBL States of the 9110 MicroBTS/9110-E Micro BTS
The allowed states for the Managed Objects and SBLs of the 9110 MicroBTS/9110-E Micro BTS are shown in the following tables.
13.4.1 Allowed States of Managed Object Abis_PCM (SBL Abis-HWAY-TP)
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FLT Unlocked Disabled Failed -
EF Unlocked Disabled Dependency/failed -
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
Table 64: Allowed States of Managed Object Abis_PCM (SBL Abis-HWAY-TP)
13.4.2 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) BTS
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT - - - -
MSD - - - -
MSA - - - -
Table 65: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) BTS (1)
(1) The OMU does not receive a message that these Managed Objects areequipped. It sets their state to unlocked/enabled (IT).
13.4.3 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CCF
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
NEQ (2) - - - -
Table 66: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CCF
(2) The CCF SBL is always in the NEQ state because 9110 Micro BTS/9110-EMicro BTS do not have any cooling fans.
194 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.4.4 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CLLK
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FLT (4) Unlocked Disabled Failed -
FOS (3) Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
Table 67: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CLLK
(3) After a repair action, CLLK initialization takes place during SUM power up.
(4) The CLLK is put to unlocked/disabled (FLT) state when it is configured inslave mode but the external clock is not available.
13.4.5 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CU
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/ Disabled -
SOS Unlocked Disabled Dependency -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 68: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CU
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 195 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.4.6 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) EACB
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT (5) - - - -
FOS (5) - - - -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA (5) - - - -
NEQ - - - -
Table 69: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) EACB
(5) No XIOB is provided. Therefore, the EACB cannot get the FOS, FIT andMSA states.
13.4.7 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) FU
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FLT Unlocked Disabled Failed -
SOS Unlocked Disabled Dependency -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 70: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) FU
196 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.4.8 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) OMU
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
Table 71: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) OMU
13.4.9 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) RA
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
SOS Unlocked Disabled Dependency -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 72: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) RA
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 197 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.5 Allowed Managed Objects and SBL States of the 9100 BTSThe allowed states for the Managed Objects and SBLs of the 9100 BTS areshown in the following table.
13.5.1 Allowed States of Managed Object Abis_PCM (SBL Abis-HWAY-TP)
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FLT Unlocked Disabled Failed -
EF Unlocked Disabled Dependency/failed -
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
Table 73: Allowed States of Managed Object Abis_PCM (SBL Abis-HWAY-TP)
13.5.2 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) BTS
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT - - - -
MSA - - - -
MSD - - - -
Table 74: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) BTS (1)
(1) The OMU/SUM does not receive a message that these Managed Objectsare equipped. It sets their state to unlocked/enabled (IT).
198 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.5.3 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CCF
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 75: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CCF
13.5.4 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CLLK
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FLT (3) Unlocked Disabled Failed -
FOS (2) Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
Table 76: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CLLK
(2) After a repair action, CLLK initialization takes place during OMU/SUMpower up.
(3) The CLLK is put to unlocked/disabled (FLT) state when it is configured inslave mode but the external clock is not available.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 199 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.5.5 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CU
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
SOS Unlocked Disabled Dependency -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 77: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) CU
13.5.6 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) EACB
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 78: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) EACB
200 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.5.7 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) FU
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FLT Unlocked Disabled Failed -
SOS Unlocked Disabled Dependency -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 79: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) FU
13.5.8 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) OMU
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
Table 80: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) OMU
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 201 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.5.9 Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) RA
SBL Admin. State Operat. State Availab. State Control State
IT Unlocked Enabled - -
FIT Unlocked Enabled Degraded -
FOS Unlocked Disabled Off-Line/Disabled -
SOS Unlocked Disabled Dependency -
OPR Locked No change - -
MSD Unlocked No change - Suspended
MSA Unlocked No change - Suspended
NEQ - - - -
Table 81: Allowed States of Managed Objects (SBL) RA
202 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.6 Allowed Managed Objects and SBL Actions for 9110 MicroBTS/9110-E Micro BTS
The Managed Objects and SBL commands which are allowed for the internalManaged Objects and SBLs of the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS areindicated by a checkmark ( ) in the following table.
ManagedObjectsCommand Unlock Lock Restart Reset Shutdown
SBL CommandReadStatus Initialize Disable Restart Reset
ManagedObjects/SBLType
BTS - - -
CCF (1) - - - - -
CLLK - - - - -
CU - -
EACB - -
FU
OMU - - -
RA - -
Table 82: Allowed Managed Objects and SBL Commands for the 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS
(1) The CCF is always in the NEQ state because it does not have any coolingfans.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 203 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.7 Allowed Managed Objects and SBL Actions for 9100 BTSThe Managed Objects and SBL commands which are allowed for the internalManaged Objects and SBLs of the 9100 BTS are indicated by a checkmark( ) in the following table.
ManagedObjectsCommand Unlock Lock Restart Reset Shutdown
SBL CommandReadStatus Initialize Disable Restart Reset
ManagedObjects/SBLType
BTS - - -
CCF - -
CLLK - - - - -
CU - -
EACB - -
FU
OMU - - -
Table 83: Allowed Managed Objects and SBL Commands for the 9100 BTS
204 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.8 BTS 9110/9110-E RITsBTS 9110/9110-Es are single replaceable units. Implementing fault localizationat a more refined level than the whole equipment is unnecessary. The BTS9110/9110-E RITs are listed in the following table.
RITName
RITFunction
GSM850
GSM900
GSM1800
GSM1900
O&MControlled
ABISCO Abis Connection Board - - -
ACCO Alternating Current Connection - - -
ANTD Internal Antenna GSM 1800 - - - -
ANTG Internal Antenna GSM 900 - - - -
DB4D 9110 Micro BTS-S Basic or ExtensionBTS unit GSM 1800 with antenna diversity
- - -
DB4E 9110 Micro BTS-S Basic or ExtensionBTS unit Extended GSM Frequency Band(E-GSM) with antenna diversity
- - -
DB4G 9110 Micro BTS-S Basic or ExtensionBTS unit GSM 900 with antenna diversity
- - -
MB4D 9110 Micro BTS-S Basic or Extension BTSunit GSM 1800 without antenna diversity
- - -
MB4E 9110 Micro BTS-S Basic or ExtensionBTS unit E-GSM without antenna diversity
- - -
MB4G 9110 Micro BTS-S Basic or Extension BTSunit GSM 900 without antenna diversity
- - -
MFCC Micro-BTS Fan - -
SSCB Battery for SSC - - -
SSCCF Connector field for SSC - - -
SSCF Fan external for SSC - - -
SSCFH Fan and heater internal for SSC - - -
SSCLP Lightning protection for SSC (two per SSC) - - -
SSCPS AC/DC converter for SSC (three per SSC) - - -
VSWD VSWR detector GSM 1800 - - -
VSWG VSWR detector GSM 900 - - -
Table 84: 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS
SBL/RIT Relationships All 9110 Micro BTS/9110-E Micro BTS SBLs arerelated uniquely to their RIT.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 205 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.9 BTS 9110/9110-E SBLs and RITs Reported to the OMC-RThe BTS 9110 SBLs and RITs reported to the OMC-R are listed in thefollowing table.
SBL RITs for GSM 900 RITs for GSM 1800
CLLK DB4E, DB4G, MB4E, MB4G DB4D, MB4D
RA DB4E, DB4G, MB4E, MB4G DB4D, MB4D
EACB None. None.
CU DB4E, DB4G, MB4E, MB4G DB4D, MB4D
FU DB4E, DB4G, MB4E, MB4G DB4D, MB4D
OMU DB4E, DB4G, MB4E, MB4G DB4D, MB4D
Table 85: 9110 Micro BTS SBLs and RITs Reported to the OMC-R
SBL RITs for GSM 850 RITs for GSM 900 RITs for GSM 1800 RITs for GSM 1900
CLLK DB5L, MB5L DB5E, DB5G, MB5E,MB5G
DB5D, MB5D DB5P, MB5P
RA DB5L, MB5L DB4E, DB4G, MB4E,MB4G
DB5D, MB5D DB5P, MB5P
EACB None. None. None. DB5P, MB5P
CU DB5L, MB5L DB4E, DB4G, MB4E,MB4G
DB5D, MB5D DB5P, MB5P
FU DB5L, MB5L DB4E, DB4G, MB4E,MB4G
DB5D, MB5D DB5P, MB5P
OMU DB5L, MB5L DB4E, DB4G, MB4E,MB4G
DB5D, MB5D DB5P, MB5P
Table 86: 9110-E Micro BTS SBLs and RITs Reported to the OMC-R
206 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.10 9100 BTS RITsThe 9100 BTS RITs are listed in the following table.
RITName
RITFunction
GSM850
GSM900
GSM1800
GSM1900
O&MControlled
ABAC AC Battery Control Unit - -
ACIB AC Interface Box - -
ACRI AC Remote Inventory - -
ADAM Adapter Module - -
ADAM4 Adapter Module 4 -
ANCD Antenna Network Combiner GSM 1800 - - -
ANCG Antenna Network Combiner GSM 900 - - -
ANCL Antenna Network Combiner GSM 850 - - -
ANCP AC Power Distribution Panel - - -
ANXD Antenna Network Module - Type X - GSM1800
- - -
ANXG Antenna Network Module - Type X - GSM900
- - -
ANXP Antenna Network Module - Type X - DigitalCellular System at 1900 MHz (GSM 1900)
- - -
ANYD Antenna Network Module - Type Y - GSM1800
- - -
ANYG Antenna Network Module - Type Y - GSM900
- - -
ANYL Antenna Network Module - Type Y - GSM850
- - -
ANYP Antenna Network Module - Type Y - GSM1900
- - -
APOD AC Power Distribution Panel - -
BAC2 Battery Connection 2 - -
BACO Battery Connection - -
BCU1 Battery Control Unit 1 -
BCU2 Battery Control Unit 2 -
BATL Large Battery Unit - -
BATLM Large Multi Battery Unit -
BATM Medium Battery Unit -
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 207 / 234
13 BTS Objects
RITName
RITFunction
GSM850
GSM900
GSM1800
GSM1900
O&MControlled
BATS Small Battery Unit - -
DAC8 Direct Air Cooling -
DAC9 Direct Air Cooling -
FACB Fans Control Board
FANU Fan Unit
HEAT2 Heating Unit -
HEX2 Heat Exchanger - -
HEX3 Heat Exchanger -
HEX4 Heat Exchanger -
OUTC Outdoor Control Board
PM08 Power Module 800 W -
PM11 Power Module 1100 W -
PM12 Power Module 1200 W
SUMA Station Unit Module
SUMP Station Unit Module PCM -
SUMX Station Unit Module
TADH TRE Module - GSM 1800 - High Power - - -
TADHE TRE Module - GSM 1800 - High PowerGMSK and 8-PSK
- - - -
TRAD TRE Module - GSM 1800 - Medium Power - - -
TRADE TRE Module - GSM 1800 - Medium PowerEnhanced 8-PSK power
TRAG TRE Module - GSM 900 - Medium Power - - -
TRAGE TRE Module - GSM 900 - Medium PowerEnhanced 8-PSK power
TAGH TRE Module - GSM 900 - High Power - - - -
TAGHE TRE Module - GSM 900 - High PowerGMSK and 8-PSK
- - - -
TRAL TRE Module - GSM 850 - Medium Power - - -
TRAP TRE Module - GSM 1900 - Medium Power - - -
TRDH TRE Module - GSM 1800 - High Power - - -
TRDM TRE Module - GSM 1800 - Medium Power - - -
208 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
RITName
RITFunction
GSM850
GSM900
GSM1800
GSM1900
O&MControlled
TRGM TRE Module - GSM 900- Medium Power - - -
TRPM TRE Module - GSM 1900 - Medium Power - - -
XIBM External I/O Board
XIOB External I/O Board -
Table 87: 9100 BTS RITs
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 209 / 234
13 BTS Objects
13.11 9100 BTS SBLs and RITs Reported to the OMC-RThe 9100 BTS SBLs and RITs reported to the OMC-R are listed in thefollowing table.
SBL RITs for GSM 850 RITs for GSM 900 RITs for GSM 1800 RITs for GSM 1900
BTS BATM, BATLM, PM12 BATM, BATL, BATLM,BATS, BCU1, BCU2,PM08, PM11, PM12
BATM, BATL, BATLM,BATS, BCU1, BCU2,PM08, PM11, PM12
BATM, BATL, BATLM,BATS, BCU1, BCU2,PM08, PM11, PM12
CCF FACB, FANU FACB, FANU FACB, FANU FACB, FANU
CLLK SUMA, SUMX SUMA, SUMP, SUMX SUMA, SUMP, SUMX SUMA, SUMP, SUMX
RA ANCL, ANYL ANCG, ANXG, ANYG ANCD, ANXD, ANYD ANCP, ANXP, ANYP
EACB XIBM, OUTC XIBM, XIOB, OUTC XIBM, XIOB, OUTC XIBM, XIOB, OUTC
OMU SUMA, SUMX SUMA, SUMP, SUMX SUMA, SUMP, SUMX SUMA, SUMP, SUMX
CU TRAL TAGH, TRAG,TAGHE, TRAGE,TRGM
TADH, TRAD,TADHE, TRADE,TRDH, TRDM
TRAP, TRPM
FU TRAL TAGH, TRAG,TRAGE, TRGM
TADH, TRAD,TRADE, TRDH,TRDM
TRAP, TRPM
Table 88: 9100 BTS SBLs and RITs Reported to the OMC-R
210 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
13.12 BTS RBLs and Local Fault Indication via LEDsMost of the BTS RITs have LEDs mounted on their front panels.
These conform to the following colors and status for maintenance purposes:
Green LEDThe RIT is powered when the green LED is ON unless otherwise stated.There can be more than one green LED.
Red LEDFlashing or continuously ON in the case of permanent failure.
Yellow LEDsThese LEDs indicate software checks. Consult the hardware description ofthe particular RIT to obtain more detailed information about the function ofthese LEDs.
The following tables list the associated RBL for each RIT. Where more thanone RBL exists, the disable sequence is shown.
The front panel LEDs for each RIT are indicated by a checkmark ( ). A dash (-)indicates that no LED is present. Only RITs which have LEDs are shown inthese tables. In many cases there is more than one LED of a particular color.The exact function of each LED is not within the scope of this document. Formore information, refer to the BTS 9110 / 9110-E Hardware Description orthe 9100 BTS Hardware Description
RIT Name RBL Green LED Red LED Yellow LED
DB4D TRE
DB4E TRE
DB4G TRE
MB4D TRE
MB4E TRE
MB4G TRE
MFCC N/A - - -
Table 89: 9110 Micro BTS / 9110-E Micro BTS RITs with Corresponding RBLs and LED Indications
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 211 / 234
13 BTS Objects
RIT Name RBL Green LED Red LED Yellow LED
ACRI N/A - -
ANCD RA -
ANCG RA -
ANCL RA -
ANCP RA -
ANXD RA
ANXG RA
ANXP RA
ANYD RA - - -
BCU1 N/A
BCU2 N/A
HEX2 N/A - -
PM08 (Version BAAA) BTS - -
PM08 (Version BBAA) BTS
PM11 BTS - -
PM12 BTS - -
SUMA RA
SUMP RA
SUMX RA
TADH TRE
TADHE TRE
TAGH TRE
TAGHE TRE
TRAD TRE
TRADE TRE
TRAG TRE
TRAGE TRE
TRAL TRE
TRAP TRE
212 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
13 BTS Objects
RIT Name RBL Green LED Red LED Yellow LED
TRDH TRE
TRDM TRE
TRGM TRE
TRPM TRE
Table 90: 9100 BTS RITs with Corresponding RBLs and LED Indications
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 213 / 234
13 BTS Objects
214 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
14 Example Functions
14 Example Functions
This chapter shows how the BTS software works with other parts of thesystem, to link Mobile Stations to the land-based network. The examples arerepresentative only, and illustrate some of the principal GSM system functions.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 215 / 234
14 Example Functions
14.1 TelecommunicationThis section provides examples of the operation of telecommunicationfunctions, which are:
Handover
Timing advance
Paging
Channel interference monitoring
LAPD failure
In-band signalling.
14.1.1 Handover
Handover procedures are primarily managed by Layer 3 software located inthe SCP. All BTS handovers are asynchronous.
In an asynchronous handover the target BTS controls the Mobile Stationaccess. The target BTS has a channel pre-assigned by the BSC for the MobileStation to access when it changes cell. A ’Physical Information’ message,which includes new timing advance information, is sent to the Mobile Station.
To establish a link with the target BTS a ’Handover Access’ message is sentfrom the Mobile Station. The target BTS then sends a ’Handover Detection’message to the BSC. When the Mobile Station fully establishes the link, itreports completion of the procedure to the BSC. This is done using a ’HandoverComplete’ message, which is transparently transferred by the target BTS. TheBSC then sends an ’RF Channel Release’ message to the original BTS torelease the radio resources.
If the link is not established within a predefined time period, the target BTSrepeats the physical information message. If establishment of the link is still notconfirmed within a predefined period, the target BTS stops the transmission. Itthen sends a ’Handover Access Failure’ message to the BSC. If the MobileStation cannot access the new radio channel, it attempts to re-establish the linkwith the original BTS. In this case the Mobile Station also reports the failure tothe BSC with a ’Handover Failure’ message.
Note: In multiband operation, a congestion mechanism, for example, can cause theMobile Station to perform a handover between the main and secondary bands.This is to prevent saturation of the cell. Multiband operation is supported onMultiband Mobile Stations that are compliant to Phase 2, or later.
216 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
14 Example Functions
BSC
Channel Activation message informs Target BTSof handover type, and pre−assigns channel forMobile Station to access when it changes cell.
BSC
BSC
Target BTSTarget BTS sends physical Informationmessage to Mobile Station. This includesnew timing advance information.
Target BTS Mobile Station requests access to target BTSby sending Handover Access message.
Target BTS grants handover access.
Target BTS sends HandoverDetection message to BSC.
Target BTSMobile Station sends HandoverComplete message to BSC via BTS.
Mobile Station continues call inprogress without interruption.
Previous BTS
Radio resources available forre−allocation.
BSC sends Channel Releasemessage to last BTS to releaseradio resources.
Figure 33: Asynchronous Handover
14.1.2 Timing Advance
Timing Advance is used to compensate for changing transmission delaysbetween Mobile Stations and the BTS. The TRE/MTRE monitors the arrivaltime of bursts from each Mobile Station. These measurements are passedto the BSC. The BSC calculates a new timing offset to compensate for anychange in BTS-to-Mobile Station distance. Timing advance commands fromthe BSC are transparently forwarded to the Mobile Stations.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 217 / 234
14 Example Functions
14.1.3 Paging
The paging algorithm creates ’Paging Request’ messages in response topaging commands sent from the BSC. Each paging command identifies thepaging group of the Mobile Station concerned.
For each paging group, the BTS maintains a paging message queue. When apaging command is received, the algorithm attempts to include the specifiedMobile Station in the ’Paging Request’ message at the end of the queue. Ifthe message is full, a new message is created and added to the queue. Thequeued messages are periodically transmitted and removed from the queue.
Note: To minimize overhead, the paging algorithm selects one of three types ofpaging request message. The type of paging request message depends on theformat of the Mobile Station identification. Depending on its type, the pagingrequest message identifies between one and four Mobile Stations.
14.1.4 Channel Interference Monitoring
The DEC continuously performs two types of measurements on the datareceived from the TRE/MTRE:
Noise (interference) level on the idle time slots
SNR.
The parameters are sent to the SCP in two different messages. These aresubsequently forwarded to the BSC for use when allocating traffic to idletime slots.
14.1.5 LAPD Failure
Whenever a LAPD failure occurs on the Abis Interface, the error is reportedto the BTS Layer 3 functions. The error is passed back to the BSC, if thefailure permits.
14.1.6 In-Band Signalling
In-band signalling is used where urgent/fast message transfer is required. Inorder to provide an instantly available signalling channel, traffic channels aretemporarily ’borrowed’ for messaging. This can also be done to increasesignalling channel bandwidth. Typical uses are for handover commands, callestablishment progress messages and fault reports.
218 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
14 Example Functions
14.2 Telecommunications Overload ProtectionThe following section provides an example of a telecommunications overloadprotection function.
Internal BTS overload situations are prevented by informing the BSC ofunacceptably high operational loads in the TRE/MTRE.
SCP-idle time is monitored over a fixed observation period. The percentage ofavailable TRE/MTRE telecommunication buffers is also monitored. If eithermeasurement falls below predefined thresholds, actions are taken accordingto the degree of overload detected:
1. A timer is used to delay triggering of overload defense actions (to preventshort load transients causing unnecessary fault reports).
2. Local defense actions are triggered to limit the load of the TRE/MTRE.
3. An ’Overload Detected’ message is forwarded towards the BSC. The BSCthen takes steps to reduce the demands on the TRE/MTRE.
Note: Since a watchdog is included in the SCP, a complete overload results ina TRE/MTRE reset.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 219 / 234
14 Example Functions
14.3 Mobile Station RF Power ControlThe following figure shows how the BTS adjust Mobile Station RF poweraccording to the uplink signal strength received.
Mobile Station BSCTRE/MTRE
DEC SCPRXPAnalog
L_LRXDATA (low gain)
as in−band signaling
ENC
SACCH bursts
H_LRXDATA (high gain)
RSSI inserted
Measurement Result Message
to BSC via Layer 3
RXLEV_AV and RXQUAL
to BTS via Layer 3
MS_POWER_CONTROL
SACCH MS Power Command in Layer 1 Header
High or low gain output selected. RSSI calculated for each time slot.
RSSI values filtered and averaged for each time slot over 104 frames, to produce RXLEV_AV
Average Bit Error Rate estimated to produce EXQUAL quality parameter
I/Q demodulation
A−D conversion
Power Control threshold comparison as shown in Figure 33
Power Step extracted from Power Control command
Power Step from ENCT inserted into SACCH
RF power adjusted
Power Step parameter
Figure 34: RF Power Control Applied to Mobile Station
220 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
14 Example Functions
The following figure shows the parameters evaluated by the power control andhandover algorithms. It also shows the type of action taken when specifiedthreshold values are reached. Handover decisions are made by the BSC,based on measurement result messages from the BTS.
123412341234123412341234123412341234123412341234123412341234
123456789012345678901234567123456789012345678901234567123456789012345678901234567123456789012345678901234567
LEV Intercell H/O
Intracell H/O
Power Increase
No Power Command Required
Power Decrease
0 10 30 40 50 60
0
2
3
6
7 RXLEV
RXQUAL
Lower RXLEV threshold for Intercell Handover
Lower RXLEV threshold for Power Increase
Lower RXLEV threshold for Intracell Handover
Upper RXLEV threshold for Power Decrease
Upper RXQUAL threshold for Power Decrease
Lower RXQUAL threshold for Power Increase
Lower RXQUAL threshold for Inter/Intracell Handover, depending on RXLEV
20
5
4
1
QUAL Intercell H/O
Figure 35: Mobile Station Power Control and Handover Thresholds
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 221 / 234
14 Example Functions
222 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
15 Software Interaction Scenario
15 Software Interaction Scenario
This chapter shows a typical scenario to illustrate the high-level interactionbetween principal BTS software entities.
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 223 / 234
15 Software Interaction Scenario
15.1 BCCH-TRE FaultThe scenario details a typical high-level interaction between principal BTSsoftware entities that follow a fault arising in a TRE/MTRE allocated to theBCCH.
The order of actions is representative, since it varies according to the exactnature of the failure.
Interaction sequence:
1. If an abnormal situation is internally detected by the TRE/MTRE, itautonomously sends an error message to the SUM with a status of Faulty.
2. The TRE/MTRE is marked as ’maintenance seized’ in the SUM databasewhile it is subjected to further checks. Using the data supplied by theTRE/MTRE, the SUM correlates the detected alarms (including those fromother sources) to eliminate secondary, ’knock-on’ effects. This pinpointsthe underlying cause of the failure.
3. If the TRE/MTRE is indeed faulty, a recovery request is sent to the BSC.The BSC responds with a recovery report and determines the appropriaterecovery action based on the data received from the SUM. The SUM isnotified of the recovery action by a reconfiguration message.
4. Local defense and recovery actions are now run concurrently.
The defense actions power down the faulty TRE/MTRE.
The recovery actions specified by the BSC are used to reconfigure theBTS. These includes re-allocation of the radio channels to the remainingTRE/MTREs (to ensure the preservation of the BCCH-Carrier). Thewideband combiner requires no reconfiguration.
The TRE/MTRE, Frequency Hopping function and External AlarmConnection function are also reconfigured.
5. The TRE/MTRE is marked as faulty/out-of-service in the SUM database. Areport is forwarded to the BSC.
224 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
15 Software Interaction Scenario
15.2 Interaction Fault ReportsThe following figure shows a typical sequence of reports which follow a faultarising in a TRE/MTRE allocated to the BCCH.
SUM TRE/MTRE Impacted Internal BTS Entities
BSC
TRE/MTRE Faulty Report
Request Recovery
Recovery Report
Reconfiguration Data
Report Fault Status
1
2
3
4
5
Fault Occurs
Mark TRE/MTRE as Maintenance Seized
Correlate Alarms and Determine if TRE/MTRE is indeed Faulty
Determine Recovery Action
Mark TRE/MTRE as Faulty/Out−of−Service
Local Defense Actions and Reconfiguration
Figure 36: TRE/MTRE Fault Report Scenario
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 225 / 234
15 Software Interaction Scenario
226 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
16 Start-Up Scenario
16 Start-Up Scenario
This Scenario shows the different reset/restart sequence for all BTS start-upscenarii.
These scenarii are:
BTS/SUM/MSUM Power Up
Restart BTS (SBL)
Restart OMU (SBL)
OMU Auto-restart
Reset BTS
Reset OMU
OMU Auto-reset.
The BTS/SUM/MSUM Power-up scenario is fully described in BTS Start Upand Initialization (Section 12). The remaining scenarii use actions that are alsodescribed in Chapter 12, but in lesser detail than that used for the first scenario.
The full set of scenarii is included here for completeness. The sequence ofevents shown in each scenario is understandable in terms of the detaileddescription provided in BTS Start Up and Initialization (Section 12).
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 227 / 234
16 Start-Up Scenario
16.1 BTS/SUM/MSUM Power UpThe following figure shows the BTS/SUM/MSUM Power-up sequence of events.
SUM Software ModuleBSC
SUM/MSUM Power Up
BTS Master File, SUM SW/SPF Download
BSC Connection
BTS Fault Indication
SUM Auto−test
Actions after OMU or BTS Power Up, (Auto) Restart, (Auto) Reset
Time
BTS/OMU Started
SUM Software ModuleBSC
Software Activate (SBL BTS or SBL OMU Level)
Other BTS Sofware Packages Download
Figure 37: BTS/SUM/MSUM Power Up Process Diagram
228 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
16 Start-Up Scenario
16.2 Restart SBL BTSThe following figure shows the Restart SBL BTS sequence of events.
BSC SUM Module
BSC and IOM Disconnection
Restart of SUM Software
BSC Connection
Start of IOM_CONF Broadcast
BTS Context Recovery
BTS_CONF_REQUEST
BTS_ACK
BTS_CONF_DATA
BTS_ACK
BTS_CONF_COMPL
BTS_ACK
BTS Restart:BTS Module Initialization
Time
Figure 38: Restart SBL BTS Process Diagram
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 229 / 234
16 Start-Up Scenario
16.3 Restart SBL OMUThe following figure shows the Restart SBL OMU sequence of events.
BSC SUM Module
BSC and IOM Disconnection
Restart of SUM Software
BSC Connection
Start of IOM_CONF Broadcast
BTS Context Recovery
BTS_CONF_REQUEST
BTS_ACK
BTS_CONF_DATA
BTS_ACK
OMU Restart:BTS Module Reconfiguration
BTS_CONF_COMPL
BTS_ACK
Time
Figure 39: Restart SBL OMU Process Diagram
230 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
16 Start-Up Scenario
16.4 SBL OMU Auto-RestartThe following figure shows the SBL OMU auto-restart sequence of events.
BSC SUM Module
Save the Origin of the Auto−restart
BSC and IOM Disconnection
Restart of SUM Software
BSC Connection
IncrementOMU_Auto−restart_Count
Start of IOM_CONF Broadcast
BTS Context Recovery
BTS Fault Indication
Actions after OMU or BTSPower Up, (Auto) Restart, (Auto) Reset
Time
Figure 40: SBL OMU Auto-Restart Process Diagram
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 231 / 234
16 Start-Up Scenario
16.5 Reset SBL BTSThe following figure shows the Reset SBL BTS sequence of events.
BSC SUM Module
BTS Reset:Hardware Reset of the Modules which are not Isolated
SUM goes to Bootstrap
SUM Autotest
BSC Connection
BTS/OMU Started
BTS Master File, SUM Software/SPF Download
BSC SUM Module
Other
Software Activate (BTS Level)
BSC SUM Module
Time
BTS Software Packages Download
BSC and IOM Disconnection
Figure 41: Reset SBL BTS Process Diagram
232 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08
16 Start-Up Scenario
16.6 Reset SBL OMUThe following figure shows the Reset SBL OMU sequence of events.
BSC SUM Module
BSC and IOM Disconnection
SUM goes to Bootstrap
SUM Auto−test
BSC Connection
BTS/OMU Started
BTS Master File, SUM Software/SPF Download
BSC SUM Module
Other
Software Activate (OMU Level)
BSC SUM Module
Time
BTS Software Packages Download
Figure 42: Reset SBL OMU Process Diagram
3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08 233 / 234
16 Start-Up Scenario
16.7 SBL OMU Auto-ResetThe following figure shows the SBL OMU Auto-Reset sequence of events.
BSC SUM Module
Save the Origin of the Auto−Reset
BSC and IOM Disconnection
SUM
SUM Auto−test
BSC Connection
BTS/OMU Started
BTS Master File, SUM Software/SPF Download
BSC SUM Module
Other
Software Activate (BTS or OMU Level)
BTS Fault Indication
Actions after OMU or BTS Power Up, (Auto) Restart, (Auto) Reset
Time
SUM goes to Bootstrap
BTS Software Packages Download
Figure 43: SBL OMU Auto-Reset Process Diagram
234 / 234 3BK 21244 AAAA TQZZA Ed.08